Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
Model: DP-3520/3540/4520/4540
Publish Date: November 2003
File No. SHE030005S0
R03092141302-TTEC
Ver19_2008-07
08/04
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE INSTALLATION
AND SERVICE FOR e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
The installation and service should be done by a qualified service
technician.
1) Transportation / Installation
- When transporting/installing the equipment, employ two persons and be sure to use the positions
as indicated below.
The equipment is quite heavy and weighs approximately 83kg (182.98 lb.): e-STUDIO350/450 /
86kg (189.59 lb.): e-STUDIO352/353/452/453 therefore pay fullattention when handling it.
- Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the control panel, ADU or RADF) when trans-
porting the equipment.
- Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 110V/13.2A, 115V or 127V / 12A, 220-240V or 240V /
8A for its power source.
- The equipment must be grounded for safety.
Never ground it to a gas pipe or a water pipe.
- Select a suitable place for installation.
Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and direct sunlight.
- Also provide proper ventilation as the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone.
- To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of 80
cm (32”) on the left, 80 cm (32”) on the right and 10 cm (4”) in the rear.
- The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.
- Be sure to fix and plug in the power cable securely after the installation so that no one trips over
it.
07/11
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2) Service of Machines
- Basically, be sure to turn the main switch off and unplug the power cord during service.
- Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, the fuser unit, the
damp heater and their periphery.
- Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, developer, IH control circuit,
high-voltage transformer, exposure lamp control inverter, inverter for the LCD backlight and
power supply unit. Especially, the board of these components should not be touched since the
electric charge may remain in the capacitors, etc. on them even after the power is turned OFF.
- Be sure not to touch rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts, pulleys, fan, etc.
- Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges
underneath.
- When servicing the machines with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and
rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposure to laser radiation.
- Use suitable measuring instruments and tools.
- Avoid exposure to laser radiation during servicing.
Avoid direct exposure to the beam.Do not insert tools, parts, etc. that are reflective into the path
of the laser beam.Remove all watches, rings, bracelets, etc. that are reflective.
- Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug once a year or more.
A fire may occur when dust lies on this area.
- Be very careful to treat the touch panel gently and never hit it. Breaking the surface could cause
malfunctions.
4) Cautionary Labels
- During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and the cautionary labels such as “Unplug the
power cord during service”, “Hot area”, “Laser warning label” etc. to see if there is any dirt on
their surface and whether they are properly stuck to the equipment.
6) When parts are disassembled, reassembly is basically the reverse of disassembly unless
otherwise noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to reassemble
small parts such as screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers, harnesses in the wrong
places.
7) Basically, the machine should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled.
Caution: Before using the wristband, pull out the power cord plug of the equipment and
make sure that there are no uninsulated charged objects in the vicinity.
07/06
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Caution:
Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual.
Attention:
Se débarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs usés y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel.
Vorsicht:
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inklusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem Handbuch.
06/09
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
CONTENTS
e-STUDIO350/450
Values in [ ] are for e-STUDIO450/452/453 in case that the specification is different between e-STUDIO350/
352/353 and e-STUDIO450/452/453.
e-STUDIO350/352/353
Paper supply
Bypass feed
Paper size
Drawer Size not PFP LCF
Size specified
specified
A4, LT, B5 35 35 18 35 35
A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, 25 25 18 25 -
LT-R, ST-R
B4, LG 21 21 18 21 -
A3, LD 18 18 18 18 -
e-STUDIO450/452/453
Paper supply
Bypass feed
Paper size
Drawer Size not PFP LCF
Size specified
specified
A4, LT, B5 45 40 21 45 45
A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, 28 28 21 28 -
LT-R, ST-R
B4, LG 24 24 21 24 -
A3, LD 21 21 21 21 -
* “–” means “Not acceptable”.
* The copy speed in the above table are available when originals are manually placed for single side,
multiple copying.
* When the RADF is used, the copy speed of 35[45] sheets per minute is only available under the fol-
lowing conditions:
• Original/Mode: Single side original/A4/LT size. APS/automatic density are not selected.
• Number of sheets: 35[45] or more.
• Paper feeding: LCF
• Reproduction ratio: 100%
• Copy paper
Drawer ADU PFP LCF Bypass copy Remarks
Size A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R
A3 to A5-R
A4, LT (Non-standard or user-
LD to ST-R
specified sizes can be set.)
64 to 209 g/m2, 17 to 55
Weight 64 to 105 g/m2 lb.(Continuous feeding)
17 to 28 lb. 50 to 209 g/m2, 13 to 55 lb.
(Single paper feeding)
Tracing paper, labels, These special paper
Special
- OHP film (thickness: 80µm recommended
paper
or thicker) by Toshiba Tec
y First copy time ...................... e-STUDIO350/352/353: Approx. 3.9sec. or less
e-STUDIO450/452/453: Approx. 3.9sec. or less
(A4/LT, upper drawer, 100%, original placed manually)
y Eliminated portion................. Leading edges: 3.0±2.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 2.0±2.0 mm (copy)
Leading / trailing edges: 5.0±2.0 mm, Side edges: 5.0±2.0 mm (print)
Bypass feeding:
(Stack height 11 mm: equivalent to 100 sheets; 64 to 80 g/m (17 to 22
lb.))
y Density control...................... Automatic density mode and manual density mode selectable in 11
steps
y Power requirements ............. AC 110 V (±10%) / 13.2 A, 115 V (±10%) or 127 V (±10%) / 12 A
220-240 V (±10%) or 240 V (±10%) / 8 A
45˚
Fig. 1-1
Notes:
1. The bridge unit (KN-3520) is necessary for installation of the finisher (MJ-1022, MJ-1023 or
MJ-1024).
2. The finisher (MJ-1023 or MJ-1024) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit
(MJ-6004N/E/F/S).
3. The PCI slot (GO-1030) is necessary for installation of the scrambler board (GP-1030).
Drum OD-3500
Toner bag PS-TB3520 /E/N *2
Toner cartridge PS-ZT3520 /T/D/C/E *3 (e-STUDIO350/352/450/452)
PS-ZT3520C *3, PS-ZT4520 /E *3 (e-STUDIO353/453)
Developer D-3500
* 2) N: Asia E: Europe NONE: North America
* 3) T: Taiwan D: Asia C: China E: Europe NONE: North America
1.5.1
Reversing Automatic
Document Feeder
(RADF) Platen Cover
MR-3015 KA-3511
Finisher
(Hanging type)
MJ-1022
Work Tray
KK-3511
System List
Staple Cartridge
1-9
05/11
Fig. 1-2
MJ-1023
Printer Kit
Offset Tray GM-1010
MJ-5005
Printer/
Scanner Kit
Scrambler PCI Slot Wireless LAN GM-2010
Board GO-1030 Adapter
GP-1030 GN-1010 Scanner
Upgrade Kit
FAX Board 2nd Line for GM-3010
Finisher
GD-1150 FAX Board
(Console saddle
NA/AU/EU/ GD-1160
stitcher type)
TW/C/AS NA/EU/TW/C
MJ-1024
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
1
1.5.2
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
STAPLE-2000
MJ-5004
Printer Kit.ELK
GM-1060/1061
Finisher
08/04
1 - 10
GM-1120
Fig. 1-3
(Console saddle
stitcher type) Printer/
Offset Tray Scanner Kit.ELK
MJ-1024 MJ-5005 GM-2060/2061
GM-2120
Finisher
(Console type)
MJ-1101 Drawer Module Paper Feed Large Capacity Desk
Hole Punch Unit MY-1021 Pedestal (PFP) Feeder (LCF) MH-1700
MJ-6101 N/E/F/S KD-1011 KD-1012 A4/LT
One of the following error codes is displayed at the upper right of the screen while pressing the [CLEAR] button
and the digital key [8] simultaneously when the “CLEAR PAPER” or “CALLSERVICE” symbol is blinking. 2
2.1.1 Jam
Notes:
1. To enter the desired mode, turn ON the power while two digital keys designated to each mode
(e.g. [0] and [5]) are pressed simultaneously.
2. When the optional FAX unit is installed, Faxes received automatically during the self-diagno-
sis mode may not be printed out. Be sure to disconnect the modular code from the line con-
nectors (LINE1, LINE2) of the equipment before starting the self-diagnosis mode. Also, be
sure to finish the self-diagnosis mode by turning the power OFF and back ON before connect-
ing the modular code.
<Operation procedure>
• Control panel check mode (01):
[POWER] OFF/ON
[0][1] LED lit/ (Exit)
[START] (Button check)
[POWER] LCD blinking
[START]
Notes:
1. A mode can be canceled by [POWER] OFF/ON when the LED is lit and the LCD is blinking.
2. Button Check
Buttons with LED (Press to turn OFF the LED.)
Buttons without LED (Press to display the message on the control panel.)
Button on touch panel (Press to display the screen on the control panel at power-ON.)
• Test print mode (04): Refer to P. 2-45 "2.2.4 Test print mode (test mode 04)"
• List print mode (9S): The procedure varies depending on the code.
[9][START]
[POWER] (Code) [START] [Digital keys] [START] [Digital keys] [START] [POWER]
101: Adjustment mode (05) Key in the first Key in the last List starts to OFF/ON
102: Setting mode (08) code to be printed code to be printed be printed (Exit)
(Code)
103: PM support mode
104: Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference)
105: Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference)
106: Error history
[POWER]
ON
Normal
Control panel Test print Adjustment Setting List print PM support Firmware
Warming up check mode Test mode mode mode mode mode update mode
mode
Ready
[POWER]
OFF
*1
To user
State transition diagram of self-diagnosis modes
Fig. 2-1
*1 Turn OFF the power after using the self-diagnosis modes, and leave the equipment to the user.
The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the [FAX] button, and the digital keys in
the test mode (03).
<Operation procedure>
[0][3] 2
[START] [FAX] [Digital keys] (LCD ON) [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER]
(Exit)
[CLEAR]
Note:
Initialization is performed before the equipment enters the test mode.
Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are
listed in the following pages.
Table 1. Relation between the status of the bypass paper width sensor and paper size (width).
Bypass paper width sensor
Paper-width size
3 2 1 0
0 1 1 1 A3/LD
1 0 1 1 A4-R/LT-R
1 1 0 1 A5-R/ST-R
1 1 1 0 Card size
0 0 1 1 B4-R/LG
1 0 0 1 B5-R
The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the [FAX] button, and the digital keys in
the test mode (03).
<Operation procedure>
[0][3]
[START] [FAX] [Digital keys] (LCD ON) [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER]
(Exit)
[CLEAR]
Note:
Initialization is performed before the equipment enters the test mode.
Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are
listed in the following pages.
Table 1. Relation between the status of the bypass paper width sensor and paper size (width).
Bypass paper width sensor
Paper-width size
3 2 1 0
0 1 1 1 A3/LD
1 0 1 1 A4-R/LT-R
1 1 0 1 A5-R/ST-R
1 1 1 0 Card size
0 0 1 1 B4-R/LG
1 0 0 1 B5-R
Table 3. Relation between the status of the original tray width sensor and paper size (width).
Original tray width sensor Paper width size Paper width size
TWID2S TWID1S TWID0S (LT series) (A4 series)
H H H LD/LT A3/A4
H H L - B5-R
H L H ST-R A5-R
L H H LD/LT A3/A4
L H L - -
L L H 8.5" x 8.5" / LT-R / LG / A4-R/FOLIO
13" LG
L L L COMPUTER B4/B5
Status of the output signals can be checked by entering the following codes in the test mode 03.
<Operation procedure>
Procedure 1
[0][3] Operation Stop Operation [POWER] OFF/ON
(Code) [START] [START]
[POWER] ON code OFF (Exit)
Procedure 2
Procedure 3
[0][3] [POWER]
Operation Operation Test mode OFF/ON
(Code) [START] [START] [CLEAR] standby
[POWER] ON OFF (Exit)
Procedure 4
[0][3]
(Code) [START] [POWER] OFF
[POWER]
The embedded test pattern can be printed out by keying in the following codes in the test print mode (04).
<Operation procedure>
[0][4]
(Code) [START] Operation [CLEAR] [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER] Continuous (Exit) 2
Test Printing
Notes:
1. When an error occurs, it is indicated on the panel, but the recovery operation is not per-
formed. Turn OFF the power and then back ON to clear the error.
2. During test printing, the [CLEAR] button is disabled when “Wait adding toner” is displayed.
Items in the adjustment mode list in the following pages can be corrected or changed in the adjustment mode
(05). Turn ON the power with pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously in order to enter this mode.
Procedure 1
[Digital key] [ENTER] [POWER]
[0][5] [Digital key] [START] *[FUNCTION CLEAR] ([FAX])
(Code) or OFF/ON
[POWER] (Key in a value) (Test copy)
[INTERRUPT] (Exit)
[CANCEL] (Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[ENTER]
[0][5]
[POWER]
(Code) [START] ( Value
displayed ) or
[INTERRUPT]
([FAX])
(Test copy)
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Value unchangeable) (Exit)
Procedure 3
[UP] [ENTER] [POWER]
[0][5] [Digital key] [START] or ([FAX])
or OFF/ON
[POWER] (Code) [DOWN] (Test copy)
[INTERRUPT] (Exit)
(Adjust a value) (Stores value in RAM)
[CANCEL]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[ENTER]
[0][5] [Digital key] [START] [Digital key] [START] [Digital key] or ([FAX] ) [POWER]
[POWER] (Code) (Sub code) *[FUNCTION CLEAR] [INTERRUPT] (Test copy) OFF/ON
(Key in a value) (Exit)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
(Stores value
in RAM )
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 6
[CANCEL]
[ENTER] [POWER]
[0][5] [Digital key] Automatic
[POWER] (Code)
[START] ( adjustment ) ( Stores value
in RAM )
([FAX])
(Test copy) OFF/ON
(Exit)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
Procedure 10
[POWER]
[0][5] [Digital key] [Digital key] Value
[POWER] (Code)
[START]
(Sub code)
[START] ( displayed ) [START] OFF/ON
(Exit)
[SET] or [INTERRUPT]
(Value unchangeable)
Procedure 17
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
Automatic [UP] [ENTER]
[0][5] [Digital key] [START] or or ([FAX]) [POWER]
[POWER] (Code) adjustment (Test copy)
[DOWN] [INTERRUPT] OFF/ON
(Adjust a value) Stores value (Exit)
in RAM
Manual
[UP] [ENTER]
adjustment
or or
[DOWN] [INTERRUPT]
(Adjust a value) Stores value
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR] in RAM
* When the "storing" is not performed within 2 minutes after pressing the [START] button
at the manual adjustment, the "automatic adjustment" starts automatically.
Note:
The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal
state. Therefore, the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the adjust-
ment mode. In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3 minutes
after it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again.
825 Image Range correc- Text/Photo SCN 12 SYS Sets whether the val- 1
tion on origi- <11-14, ues of the background
nal manually 21-24, peak and text peak are
set on the 31-34, fixed or not. One’s
original glass 41-44> place is an adjustment
for “automatic density”
and ten’s place is for
“manual density”. Once
826 Text SCN 12 SYS they are fixed, the 1
<11-14, range correction is per-
21-24, formed with standard
31-34, values.
41-44> The values of the back-
ground peak and text
peak affect the repro-
duction of the back-
827 Photo SCN 12 SYS ground density and text 1
<11-14, density respectively.
21-24, 1: fixed/fixed
31-34, 2: varied/fixed
41-44> 3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
Items in the adjustment mode list in the following pages can be corrected or changed in the adjustment mode
(05). Turn ON the power with pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously in order to enter this mode.
Procedure 1
[Digital key] [ENTER] [POWER]
[0][5] [Digital key] [START] *[FUNCTION CLEAR] ([FAX])
(Code) or OFF/ON
[POWER] (Key in a value) (Test copy)
[INTERRUPT] (Exit)
[CANCEL] (Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
[ENTER]
[0][5]
[POWER]
(Code) [START] ( Value
displayed ) or
[INTERRUPT]
([FAX])
(Test copy)
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Value unchangeable) (Exit)
Procedure 3
[UP] [ENTER] [POWER]
[0][5] [Digital key] [START] or ([FAX])
or OFF/ON
[POWER] (Code) [DOWN] (Test copy)
[INTERRUPT] (Exit)
(Adjust a value) (Stores value in RAM)
[CANCEL]
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[ENTER]
[0][5] [Digital key] [START] [Digital key] [START] [Digital key] or ([FAX] ) [POWER]
[POWER] (Code) (Sub code) *[FUNCTION CLEAR] [INTERRUPT] (Test copy) OFF/ON
(Key in a value) (Exit)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
(Stores value
in RAM )
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 6
[CANCEL]
[ENTER] [POWER]
[0][5] [Digital key] Automatic
[POWER] (Code)
[START] ( adjustment ) ( Stores value
in RAM )
([FAX])
(Test copy) OFF/ON
(Exit)
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
Procedure 10
[POWER]
[0][5] [Digital key] [Digital key] Value
[POWER] (Code)
[START]
(Sub code)
[START] ( displayed ) [START] OFF/ON
(Exit)
[SET] or [INTERRUPT]
(Value unchangeable)
Procedure 17
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
Automatic [UP] [ENTER]
[0][5] [Digital key] [START] or or ([FAX]) [POWER]
[POWER] (Code) adjustment (Test copy)
[DOWN] [INTERRUPT] OFF/ON
(Adjust a value) Stores value (Exit)
in RAM
Manual
[UP] [ENTER]
adjustment
or or
[DOWN] [INTERRUPT]
(Adjust a value) Stores value
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR] in RAM
* When the "storing" is not performed within 2 minutes after pressing the [START] button
at the manual adjustment, the "automatic adjustment" starts automatically.
Note:
The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal
state. Therefore, the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the adjust-
ment mode. In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3 minutes
after it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again.
825 Image Range correc- Text/Photo SCN 12 SYS Sets whether the val- 1
tion on origi- <11-14, ues of the background
nal manually 21-24, peak and text peak are
set on the 31-34, fixed or not. One’s
original glass 41-44> place is an adjustment
for “automatic density”
and ten’s place is for
“manual density”. Once
826 Text SCN 12 SYS they are fixed, the 1
<11-14, range correction is per-
21-24, formed with standard
31-34, values.
41-44> The values of the back-
ground peak and text
peak affect the repro-
duction of the back-
827 Photo SCN 12 SYS ground density and text 1
<11-14, density respectively.
21-24, 1: fixed/fixed
31-34, 2: varied/fixed
41-44> 3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
830 Image Range correc- Text/Photo SCN 12 SYS Sets whether the value 1
tion on origi- <11-14, of the background peak
nal set on the 21-24, and text peak are fixed
RADF 31-34, or not. One’s place is
41-44> an adjustment for
831 Text SCN 12 SYS “automatic density” and 1
<11-14, ten’s place is for “man-
21-24, ual density”. Once they
31-34, are fixed, the range
41-44> correction is per-
832 Photo SCN 12 SYS formed with standard 1
<11-14, values.
21-24, The values of the back-
31-34, ground peak and text
41-44> peak affect the repro-
duction of the back-
ground density and text
density respectively.
1: fixed/fixed
2: varied/fixed
3: fixed/varied
4: varied/varied
* Background peak/
Text peak
The items in the setting code list can be set or changed in this setting mode (08).
Procedure 1
[CANCEL]
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START] or
[POWER] (Code) *[FUNCTION CLEAR] (Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
Sets or
changes value (Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 2
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [POWER]OFF/ON
[START] or
[POWER] (Code) (Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
Adjustment value
cannot be changed
Procedure 3
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START] or (Automatic setting)
[POWER] (Code) (Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[ENTER] [POWER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key]
[START] [START] [Digital key] or OFF/ON
[POWER] (Code) (Sub-code)
* [FUNCTION CLEAR] [INTERRUPT] (Exit)
Sets or (Stores value
changes value in RAM)
[CLEAR] [CLEAR]
(Corrects value) (Corrects value)
[CANCEL]
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START] or
[POWER] (Code) *[HELP] (Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
Sets or
(Stores value in RAM)
changes value
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value) 2
* Press [HELP] to enter "-".
Procedure 7
[CANCEL]
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key]
[START] or (HDD formatting) [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER] (Code) (Setting)
[INTERRUPT] (Exit)
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 9
[CANCEL]
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START] [Select icon] or
[POWER] (Code) (Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 10
[CANCEL]
[ENTER] [POWER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key] [Digital key]
[START] [START] or OFF/ON
[POWER] (Code) (1st setting) (2nd setting)
[INTERRUPT] (Exit)
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR] [CLEAR]
(Corrects value) (Corrects value)
Procedure 11 and 12
[CANCEL]
[Digital key]
[0][8] [Digital key] or [ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START]
[POWER] (Code) [Software keyboard] *2(Stores value in RAM) (Exit)
*1 [MONITOR/PAUSE]
Sets or
changes value [CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Notes:
1. The digit after the hyphen in “Code” of the following table is a sub code.
2. e-STUDIO350/450:
In "RAM", the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated.
"M" stands for the LGC board, "SYS" and "UTY" stands for the SYS board and "NIC"
stands for the NIC board.
<Sub-codes>
0: Present number of output pages
- Means the present number of output pages.
1: Recommended number of output pages for replacement
- Means the recommended number of output pages for replacement.
2: Number of output pages at the last replacement
- Means the number of output pages at the last replacement.
3: Present driving counts
- Means the present drive counts (1 count = 2 seconds).
4: Recommended driving counts to be replaced
- Means the recommended drive counts for replacement (1 count = 2 seconds).
5: Driving counts at the last replacement
- Means the drive counts at the last replacement.
6: Present output pages for control
- Means the present number of output pages for controlling.
7: Present driving counts for control
- Means the present drive counts for controlling (1 count = 2 seconds).
8: Number of times replaced
- Counts up when clearing the counter of each unit in the PM Support Mode Screen.
Notes:
• Sub-code 3 is equivalent to sub-code 7.
• When the value of sub-code 3 is changed, the value of sub-code 7 is also updated and vice
versa.
• When "0" is set at one of sub-codes 0, 3, 6 and 7, the rest of them are automatically updated
to "0".
<e-STUDIO350/450>
PM management set- Date of previous
Items ting <Procedure 4> replacement Remarks
*Indicated in 8 digits <Procedure 2>
Photoconductive drum 1150-0 to 8 1151 <Default values of code 1150
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
Drum cleaning blade 1158-0 to 8 1159 <Default values of code 1158
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
Drum separation finger 1172-0 to 8 1173 <Default values of code 1172
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
Main charger grid 1174-0 to 8 1175 <Default values of code 1174
(e-STUDIO350/450)>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0
Sub-code 1: 120000/150000
Sub-code 4: 220000/220000
(1) Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
(2) Key in the code “257” and press the [START] button (the following is displayed).
Note:
Before performing the following operations, note the current counter values.
(3) Key in the value “1” or “2” and press the [START] button.
The value entered is displayed on the left of the “%”, and the [ENTER] button is displayed.
Note:
The value can be erased by pressing the [CLEAR] button to change as long as the [START] but-
ton is not pressed. (The value on the left of the “%” is reset to “0” by pressing the [CLEAR] but-
ton.)
(A) (B)
(A) (B)
2
(4) Press the [ENTER] button to complete overwriting of the counter value.
Note:
The screen returns to the code entry screen without copying (overwriting) the value when the
[CANCEL] button is pressed.
The items in the setting code list can be set or changed in this setting mode (08).
Procedure 1
[CANCEL]
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START] or
[POWER] (Code) *[FUNCTION CLEAR] (Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
Sets or
changes value (Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 2
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [POWER]OFF/ON
[START] or
[POWER] (Code) (Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
Adjustment value
cannot be changed
Procedure 3
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START] or (Automatic setting)
[POWER] (Code) (Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
Procedure 4
[CANCEL]
[START]
[ENTER] [POWER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key]
[START] [START] [Digital key] or OFF/ON
[POWER] (Code) (Sub-code)
* [FUNCTION CLEAR] [INTERRUPT] (Exit)
Sets or (Stores value
changes value in RAM)
[CLEAR] [CLEAR]
(Corrects value) (Corrects value)
[CANCEL]
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START] or
[POWER] (Code) *[HELP] (Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
Sets or
(Stores value in RAM)
changes value
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value) 2
* Press [HELP] to enter "-".
Procedure 7
[CANCEL]
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key]
[START] or (HDD formatting) [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER] (Code) (Setting)
[INTERRUPT] (Exit)
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 9
[CANCEL]
[ENTER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START] [Select icon] or
[POWER] (Code) (Exit)
[INTERRUPT]
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Procedure 10
[CANCEL]
[ENTER] [POWER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [Digital key] [Digital key]
[START] [START] or OFF/ON
[POWER] (Code) (1st setting) (2nd setting)
[INTERRUPT] (Exit)
(Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR] [CLEAR]
(Corrects value) (Corrects value)
Procedure 11 and 12
[CANCEL]
[Digital key]
[0][8] [Digital key] or [ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON
[START]
[POWER] (Code) [Software keyboard] *2(Stores value in RAM) (Exit)
*1 [MONITOR/PAUSE]
Sets or
changes value [CLEAR]
(Corrects value)
Notes:
1. The digit after the hyphen in “Code” of the following table is a sub code.
2. e-STUDIO352/353/452/453:
In "RAM", the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated.
"M" stands for the LGC board, "SYS", "NIC" and "UTY" stands for the SYS board.
KP-2005:
LLLL :
Key information
MMMM:
Sector number
(hexadecimal number)
1774 General Card reader format infor- ALL - SYS The data of the block 5
mation -2 number in the noncon-
tact IC is set.
KP-2003: <PPQRSSTU
(hexadecimal number)>
PP:1st block
Q: 1st block beginning
byte
R: 1st block ending-
byte
SS:2nd block
T: 2nd block begin-
ning byte
U: 2nd block ending
byte
KP-2005: <RRBSEbse
(hexadecimal number)>
RR:00 (Fixed)
B: 1st area block num-
ber
S: 1st area beginning
byte offset
E: 1st area ending byte
offset
b: 2nd area block
number
s: 2nd area beginning
byte offset
e: 2nd area ending
byte offset
<Sub-codes>
0: Present number of output pages
- Means the present number of output pages.
1: Recommended number of output pages for replacement 2
- Means the recommended number of output pages for replacement.
2: Number of output pages at the last replacement
- Means the number of output pages at the last replacement.
3: Present driving counts
- Means the present drive counts (1 count = 2 seconds).
4: Recommended driving counts to be replaced
- Means the recommended drive counts for replacement (1 count = 2 seconds).
5: Driving counts at the last replacement
- Means the drive counts at the last replacement.
6: Present output pages for control
- Means the present number of output pages for controlling.
7: Present driving counts for control
- Means the present drive counts for controlling (1 count = 2 seconds).
8: Number of times replaced
- Counts up when clearing the counter of each unit in the PM Support Mode Screen.
Notes:
• Sub-code 3 is equivalent to sub-code 7.
• When the value of sub-code 3 is changed, the value of sub-code 7 is also updated and vice
versa.
• When "0" is set at one of sub-codes 0, 3, 6 and 7, the rest of them are automatically updated
to "0".
(1) Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
(2) Key in the code “257” and press the [START] button (the following is displayed).
Note:
Before performing the following operations, note the current counter values.
(3) Key in the value “1” or “2” and press the [START] button.
The value entered is displayed on the left of the “%”, and the [ENTER] button is displayed.
Note:
The value can be erased by pressing the [CLEAR] button to change as long as the [START] but-
ton is not pressed. (The value on the left of the “%” is reset to “0” by pressing the [CLEAR] but-
ton.)
(A) (B)
(A) (B)
(4) Press the [ENTER] button to complete overwriting of the counter value.
Note:
The screen returns to the code entry screen without copying (overwriting) the value when the
[CANCEL] button is pressed.
This function enables you to know how each user uses the equipment and to grasp the tendency of
toner consumption (number of output pages per cartridge). 2
The general relations between the 4 factors mentioned in the previous page and toner consumption
per output page in the Copier Function are as follows:
Toner consumption
Toner consumption
Toner consumption
Ex.)
1. “1” is added to the print count when printing on A4/LT size.
2. “2” is added to the print count when printing on A3/LD size. (area ratio to A4/LT: 200%)
3. “1.49” is added to the print count when printing on B4 size. (area ratio to A4: 149%)
4. “1.27” is added to the print count when printing on LG size. (area ratio to LT: 127%)
Note:
In the following examples, ‘solid copy’ is considered to be 100%. But since the image has 4
margins, it never becomes 100% actually.
Ex.)
1. Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
→ Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 5
2. Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.)
→ Pixel count: 0%, Print count: 5
3. Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.)
→ Pixel count: 50%, Print count: 4
5. Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.)
→ Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 4
{: With data
: Without data
Toner cartridge reference Service technician reference
Copier function { {
Printer function { {
FAX function { {
Total { {
Table 2-201 Type of calculated data
X/2
X/10
6% 12% 60%
Pixel count (%)
Fig. 2-5 Pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge
The following screen is displayed when the buttons, [USER FUNCTIONS], [COUNTER] and
[PIXEL COUNTER] are pressed in this order after “Displayed” is selected with the code above
and the power is, as usual, turned ON.
The following screen is displayed when the toner cartridge reference is selected in the setting
mode (08-1505).
The following screen is displayed when the service technician reference is selected in the setting
mode (08-1505).
2003.4.23 09:55
2
TONERCARTRIDGE
2003.4.23 09:55
SERVICEMAN
Note:
By entering the sub code at the above code, the pixel count distribution can be displayed divid-
ing into 10 ranges. The sub codes are as follows.
0: 0 - 5% 1: 5.1 - 10% 2: 10.1 - 15% 3: 15.1 - 20% 4: 20.1 - 25%
5: 25.1 - 30% 6: 30.1 - 40% 7: 40.1 - 60% 8: 60.1- 80% 9: 80.1 - 100%
(c-3) Other information
Toner cartridge replacement counter.
The toner cartridge replacement count is displayed. (08-1566)
e-STUDIO350/450
Classification
Adjustment Mode (05) Setting Mode (08)
User interface [Date/Time]
200, 638, 640
[Timer] 2
204, 205, 206, 260
[Screen]
207, 602, 1132
[File]
209, 219, 264, 288
[Language]
220, 221
[Administrator]
263
[Scanning]
265, 266, 273, 274
[Filing]
267, 270, 950, 976, 985
[HDD]
271
[E-mail]
272, 1097, 1098
[default setting]
276, 281, 283, 284, 285, 286, 331,
480, 503, 550, 603, 604, 607, 618, 642,
986, 989, 1135
[Raw printing]
290, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295, 296, 297,
298, 299, 973, 978, 979
[Copy volume]
300
[Original counter]
302
[Custom Mode]
508
[Energy saving]
601
[AMS]
605
[Sound]
610, 969, 970
[Book duplexing]
611
[Summer time]
612
[Paper size]
613
[Department management]
620, 621, 622, 623, 624, 617, 672
e-STUDIO352/353/452/453
Classification
Adjustment Mode (05) Setting Mode (08)
User interface [Date/Time]
200, 638, 640
[Timer]
204, 205, 206, 260
[Screen]
207, 602, 1132
[File]
209, 219, 264, 288
[Language]
220, 221
[Administrator]
263
[Scanning]
265, 266, 273, 274
[Filing]
267, 270, 950, 976, 985
[HDD]
271
[E-mail]
272, 1097, 1098
[default setting]
276, 281, 283, 284, 285, 286, 331,
480, 503, 550, 603, 604, 607, 618, 642,
986, 1135
[Raw printing]
290, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295, 296, 297,
298, 299, 973, 978, 979, 1856, 1857, 9117
[Copy volume]
300
[Original counter]
302
[Custom Mode]
508
[Energy saving]
601
[AMS]
605
[Sound]
610, 969, 970
[Book duplexing]
611
[Summer time]
3852, 3853, 3854, 3855, 3856, 3857,
3858, 3859, 3860, 3861, 3862, 3863
[Paper size]
613
[Department management]
620, 621, 622, 623, 624, 617, 672
(1) Install the cleaner and developer unit into the equipment.
Note:
Do not install the toner cartridge.
(2) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
The following message will be displayed. 3
[0] [5]
100% A A3
[POWER] TEST MODE
230% 200 A3
[200] [START] TEST MODE
128 128
C A
Notes:
• A indicates the controlled value of the auto-toner sensor output.
• B indicates the output voltage of the auto-toner sensor (2.30 V in the above case).
The drum, developer unit, etc. are in operation.
• C indicates the latest adjustment value.
(4) After about two minutes, the value B automatically starts changing.
230% 200 A3
TEST MODE WAIT
128 128
240% 200 A3
ADJUSTMENT MODE
128 158
A
(6) Check if the value B is within the range of 235 to 245 (the output voltage range of the auto-toner
sensor is 2.35 V to 2.45 V).
(7) If the value B is not within the range of 235 to 245, press the Up or Down button to adjust the
value manually.
Note:
The relation between the button and the values A and B is as follows.
Up Increased Increased
Down Decreased Decreased
[ENTER]
100% A A3
or TEST MODE
[INTERRUPT]
• Paper alignment at the registration roller 448, 449, 450, 452, 455, 457,
458, 460, 461, 462, 463, 469,
470, 471, 472, 473, 474
100% A A3
0 5 TEST MODE
POWER
1
Digital keys : Enter codes. Code No.
100% XXX A3
START
TEST MODE
Digital keys : Enter adjustment YYY ZZZ
values.
Current adjustment Adjustment value newly entered
( CLEAR Use to make corrections) value (If no entering, YYY is displayed.)
100% A A3
ENTER Value ZZZ is stored
replacing values YYY.
or TEST MODE
INTERRUPT
100% A A3
FAX : Test copy Wait Warming Up
Plain 64 - 80 g/m2 450 (*1) 452 (*1) 448 (*1) 449 (*1) 457 455 (*1) 458 (*1)
paper 17 - 20 lb.
Thick 81 - 105 g/m2 469 (*1) 470 (*1) 471 (*1) 472 (*1) 473 474 (*1) 460 (*1)
paper 1 21 - 28 lb.
Sub-code
*1 0: Long size 1: Middle size 2: Short size
*2 0: Long size 1: Middle size 2: Short size 3: Post card
*3 0: Long size of OHP film 1: Middle size of OHP film 2: Short size of OHP film
Notes:
1. Long size: 330 mm or longer (13.0 inches or longer)
Middle size: 220 - 239 mm (8.7 - 12.9 inches)
Short size: 219 mm or shorter (8.6 inches or shorter)
2. The adjustment of "Post card" is for Japan only.
<Procedure>
Fig. 3-1
[A] Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rota-
tion speed (Printer))
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Press [1] → [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower
drawer.)
(3) Measure the distance A from the 1st line to the 21st line of the grid pattern.
(4) Check if the distance A is within 200±0.5 mm.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance A again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in code [401]) → [START]
→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) 3
→ [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
→ "100% A" is displayed.
→ Press [1] → [FAX] → (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance A becomes. (approx. 0.125 mm/
step)
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Press [1] → [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower
drawer.)
(3) Measure the distance B from the left edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
(4) Check if the distance B is within 52±0.5 mm.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance B again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [411]) → [START]
→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory).
→ "100% A" is displayed
→ Press [1] → [FAX] → (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance B becomes. (approx. 0.05 mm/
step)
(6) After the adjustment for the code 411 is completed, apply the same adjustment value for the
code 410.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [410]) → [START]
→ (Key in the same value in the step 5 above)
→ Press [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory).
Note:
Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished.
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment mode)
(2) Press [1] → [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower
drawer.)
(3) Measure the distance C from the 2nd line at the leading edge of the paper to the 22nd line of the
grid pattern.
* Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.
(4) Check if the distance C is within 200±0.5 mm.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance C again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in code [421]) → [START]
→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
→ "100% A" is displayed
→ Press [1] → [FAX] → (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance C becomes. (approx. 0.125 mm/
step)
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Press [1] ([3] for duplexing) → [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out.)
(3) Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
* Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.
* At the duplexing, measure it on the top side of the grid pattern.
(4) Check if the distance D is within 52±0.5 mm.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance D again.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code shown above with digital keys) → [START]
→ (Key in an acceptable value shown above with digital keys)
→ [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
→ "100% A" is displayed
→ Press [1] ([3] for duplexing)
→ [FAX] → (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance D becomes. (approx. 0.4 mm/step)
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Press [3] → [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower
drawer.)
(3) Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the
paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
(4) Check if the distance E is within 52±0.5 mm.
(5) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again.
<Procedure> 3
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in code [498]) → [START] → [0] → [START]
→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory)
→ "100% A" is displayed.
→ Press [3] → [FAX] → (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes. (approx. 0.05 mm/
step)
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Press [3] → [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A4/LT from the upper
drawer.)
(3) Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the
paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.
(4) Check if the distance E is within 52±0.5 mm
D
6
10
Feeding direction
C
30
[Grid pattern]
A Feeding direction B
Step 1
Feeding direction
C D
Step 2
Fig. 3-3
<Procedure>
Carriage-2
Fig. 3-4
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Place a ruler on the original glass (along the direction from the rear to the front of the equipment).
(3) Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and lower drawer.
(4) Measure the distance A from 10 mm to 270 mm of the copied image of the ruler.
(5) Check if the distance A is within the range of 260±0.5 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [405] with the digital keys) → [START]
→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
→ (“100% A” is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value, the higher the reproduction ratio and the longer the distance
A become (approx. 0.125 mm/step).
250
200
A
100
50
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-6
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the rear side and its side
along the original scale on the left.
(3) Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and lower drawer.
(4) Measure the distance B from the left edge of the paper to 10 mm of the copied image of the ruler.
(5) Check if the distance B is within the range of 10±0.5 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [306] with the digital keys) → [START]
→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
→ (“100% A” is displayed.) 3
* The smaller the adjustment value, the more the image is shifted to the left and the distance B
becomes narrower (0.085 mm/step).
Copied image of the ruler
200
150
100
50
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-7
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the original scale on the
left.
(3) Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 100% and lower drawer.
(4) Measure the distance C from 210 mm to 410 mm (in case of A3) or from 220 mm to 420 mm (in
case of LD) of the copied image of the ruler.
(5) Check if the distance C is within the range of 200±0.5 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat steps 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [340] with the digital keys) → [START]
→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
→ (“100% A” is displayed.)
* The smaller the adjustment value, the lower the reproduction ratio becomes. (0.045 mm/step)
Copied image of the ruler
C (LD)
C (A3)
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-8
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the original scale on the
left.
(3) Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3 (LD), 400% and lower drawer.
(4) Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to 10 mm of the copied image of the
ruler.
(5) Check if the distance D is within the range of 34±0.5 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [305] with the digital keys) → [START]
→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory). 3
→ (“100% A” is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value, the more the image is shifted to the trailing edge (0.68 mm/
step).
Copied image of the ruler
10 20 30 40
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-9
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Open the platen cover or RADF.
(3) Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and lower drawer.
(4) Measure the blank area E at the leading edge of the copied image.
(5) Check if the blank area E is within the range of 3 ± 0.5 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [430]) → [START]
→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
→ (“100% A” is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area becomes (approx.0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-10
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Open platen cover or RADF.
(3) Press [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and lower drawer.
(4) Measure the blank area F at the right side of the copied image.
(5) Check if the blank area F is within the range of 2+1 mm, 2-0.5 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [432]) ? [START]
→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory)
→ (“100% A” is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the right side becomes 3
(approx. 0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-11
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) Open platen cover or RADF.
(3) Press the [FAX] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Text/Photo and lower drawer.
(4) Measure the blank area G at the trailing edge of the copied image.
(5) Check if the blank area G is within the range of 2±0.5 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 2. to 4. above.
<Procedure>
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [433]) → [START]
→ (Key in value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ Press the [ENTER] or the [INTERRUPT] button (stored in memory).
→ (“100% A” is displayed.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the trailing edge becomes
(approx. 0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-12
503 501 504 Manual density mode center The larger the value is, the darker the
(931) (933) (932) value image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
3
505 506 507 Manual density mode light The larger the value is, the lighter the
(934) (936) (935) step value light side becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
508 509 510 Manual density mode dark The larger the value is, the darker the
(937) (939) (938) step value dark side becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
514 512 515 Automatic density mode The larger the value is, the darker the
(940) (942) (941) image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Key in a code and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in an adjustment value.
(To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.)
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. ? The equipment goes back to the
ready state.
(5) Let the equipment restarted and perform copying job.
(6) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).
* The values in "( )" are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P. 3-21 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".
620 621 622 Sharpness adjustment Key in the following values depending
(922) (924) (923) on the original mode.
One's place:
1: Text/Photo 2: Photo 5: TextTen’s
place:
0: Use Default value1 to 9:Change
intensity (The larger the value
is, the sharper the image
becomes.)
• Example of value entry in case
the mode is “Text/Photo”.
21
Fixed value for Text/Photo mode
Key in a value 0 to 9
Note:
Note:
When the value “0” is keyed in
at the ten’s digit, the value is
not displayed on LCD screen.
* The values in "( )" are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode.
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P. 3-21 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".
570 571 572 Range correction for original The following are the default values
(913) (915) (914) manually set on the original set for each original mode.
glass Text/Photo: 12, Photo: 12, Text: 22
Each digit stands for: 3
693 694 695 Range correction for original One’s place: Automatic density mode
(916) (918) (917) set on the RADF Ten’s place: Manual density mode
The setting conditions possible are
as follows:
Background peak Text peak
1: fixed fixed
2: varied fixed
3: fixed varied
4: varied varied
* The values in "( )" are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode.
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P. 3-21 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".
532 533 534 Background peak for range When the value increases, the back-
(919) (921) (920) correction ground (low density area) of the
image is not output.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: Text/Photo: 40, Photo: 16,
Text: 64)
* The values in "( )" are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode.
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P. 3-21 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".
653 Adjustment of smudged/faint When the value increases, the faint text is improved.
(928) spotted text When the value decreases, the smudged text is
improved.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 192)
Note:
Note:
Remember the image specifications and life
span of the replacing parts may not meet the
standard when the setting value is changed
from the default value.
648 Adjustment of smudged/faint When the value increases, the faint text is improved.
(928) spotted text When the value decreases, the smudged text is
improved.
Acceptable values: 0 to 4 (Default: 2)
Note:
Note:
Remember the image specifications and life
span of the replacing parts may not meet the
standard when the setting value is changed
from the default value.
* The values in "( )" are the adjustment codes of the Custom Mode.
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustment using the following procedure.
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P. 3-21 "3.3.1 Density adjustment".
596-0 597-0 598-0 599-0 Low density The larger the value is, the
density of the item to be
596-1 597-1 598-1 599-1 Medium density adjusted becomes darker.
Acceptable values:
596-2 597-2 598-2 599-2 High density 0 to 255. (Default: 128)
<Procedure> 3
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Key in a code and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.)
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to the
ready state.
(5) Let the equipment restarted and perform printing job.
(6) If the desired text density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).
672-0 to 4 676-0 to 4 Adjustment of When the value is decreased, text becomes lighter.
image density Acceptable values: 0 to 10
Notes:
1. Set not to reverse the large and small number of
the setting value corresponding to the sub code.
Ex.) When the image density level for 672-0, 672-
1, 672-2, 672-3, and 672-4 is assumed to be
"A","B", "C", "D", and "E" respectively, they should
have the following correlation:
A B C D E
2. Remember that the image specifications and life
span of the replacing parts may not meet the stan-
dard when the setting value is changed from the
default value.
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Key in a code and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the sub code (0, 1, 2, 3 or 4), and press the [START] button.
(4) Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.)
(5) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
(6) For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).
(7) Let the equipment restarted and perform printing job.
(8) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (7).
845 847 846 Manual density The larger the value is, the darker the image
mode center value becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
850 852 851 Manual density The larger the value is, the lighter the light side
mode light step value becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
855 857 856 Manual density The larger the value is, the darker the dark side
mode dark step becomes.
value Acceptable values: 0 to 255
860 862 861 Automatic density The larger the value is, the darker the image
mode becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Key in a code and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.)
(4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to the
ready state.
(5) Let the equipment restarted and perform scanning job.
(6) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).
865-0 867-0 866-0 Reproduction ratio: Key in the following values depending on the
25% to 40% original mode.
One’s place:
865-1 867-1 866-1 Reproduction ratio: 1: Text/Photo 5: Photo 2: Text
41% to 80% Ten’s place:
0: Use Default value
865-2 867-2 866-2 Reproduction ratio: 1 to 9: Change intensity
81% to 400% • The larger the value is, the sharper the
image becomes.) 3
• Example of value entry in case the mode is
“Text/Photo”.
21
Fixed value for Text/Photo mode
Key in a value 0 to 9
Note:
Note:
When the value “0” is keyed in at the
ten’s digit, the value is not displayed on
LCD screen.
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Key in a code and press the [START] button.
(3) Key in the sub code (0,1 or 2), and press the [START] button.
(4) Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR] button.)
(5) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes
back to the ready state.
(6) For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).
(7) Let the equipment restarted and perform scanning job.
(8) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (7).
825 827 826 Range correction for The following are the default values set for each
original manually set original mode.
on the original glass Text/Photo: 12, Photo: 12, Text: 12
Each digit stands for:
One’s place: Automatic density mode
Ten’s place: Manual density mode
830 832 831 Range correction for The setting conditions possible are as follows:
original set on the Background peak Text peak
RADF 1: fixed fixed
2: varied fixed
3: fixed varied
4: varied varied
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P. 3-26 "3.5.1 Density adjustment".
835 837 836 Background peak for When the value increases, the background (low
range correction density area) of the image is not output.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: text/photo: 48, photo: 40, text: 48)
<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of P. 3-26 "3.5.1 Density adjustment".
3.6.1 Adjustment
[ 1 ] Preparation
Separation
Developer Bias Main Charger Transfer Charger
Charger
Developer unit Disconnect the Take off from the equipment. (Not used)
connector. 3
Cleaner unit Take off the drum Install the unit together with the current measuring jig in the
and install the equipment.
cleaner unit in the Note:
Note:
equipment. Connect the green cable of the current measuring jig to
ground on the equipment frame. Refer to (a) Installation
of current measuring jig.
Developer unit connector Not connected Connect the jig detection connector with the developer unit
of the equipment connector of the equipment.
Digital (+) terminal Connect in the hole Connect to the Connect with the red cable of the current
Tester at the front side of main charger case measuring jig.
the developer unit. (between the case
and terminal).
(–) terminal Connect to the Connect with the white cable of the current measuring jig (to
machine frame (to ground).
ground).
Function switch DC AC
Full-scale 1,000 V 2V
Remarks Use a digital tester with an input resistance of 10 M. (RMS value) or higher.
How to turn ON the power Attach the door switch jig and press the front cover opening/closing switch while the
front cover is opened.
Remarks Refer to (b) Con- Refer to (c) Con- Refer to (d) Connection for transfer/sepa-
nection for devel- nection for main ration charger adjustment.
oper bias charger adjust-
adjustment. ment.
Front cover
Fig. 3-13
Toner bag
Fig. 3-14
Hinge pin
Fig. 3-15
Fig. 3-17
Fig. 3-18
Drum shaft
lever
Drum shaft
Fig. 3-19
Drum
Fig. 3-20
Fig. 3-21
Drum shaft
3
Fig. 3-22
Blade
releasing jig
Fig. 3-23
Fig. 3-24
Fig. 3-25
Cleaner unit
Fig. 3-26
Jig detection
connector
Green cable
Fig. 3-27
3
Fig. 3-28
[ 1-2 ] Connection
(–) terminal:
Connected to the machine frame
Fig. 3-29
Front cover
opening/closing switch
(–) terminal:
Connect the white cable of the current (+) terminal:
measuring jig Connect the main charger case
Fig. 3-30
Front cover
opening/closing switch
(+) terminal:
(–) terminal:
Connect the red cable of the current
Connect the white cable of the
measuring jig
current measuring jig
Fig. 3-31
100% A A3
TEST MODE
[0][5]
[POWER]
3
1
TEST MODE
[START]
YYY
Current set value
[UP] or [DOWN]: Adjust the value “YYY” to satisfy the following table.
Main Developer Transfer charger
charger bias charger Center value
Code 210 205 221
Adjustment value -790±5V -521±5V 413±45mV
Separation
Center value
Code 231
Adjustment value RMS value 1267±115mV
Mean value 1235±112mV
Return to 1 to enter
the other adjustment
code.
[POWER] : OFF/ON
[B] Transfer
Items to check before adjustment
Blotched image or poor transfer can be also caused by matters other than defective adjustment of
transfer output. Check the following items before adjusting the transfer charger. If there is no problem,
adjust the output of the transfer charger.
• Is the charger wire incorrectly installed or dirty? Is the transfer guide deformed?
• Is the developer unit properly installed? Is the developer magnetic brush in contact with the drum?
Is the developer sleeve rotating during printing? Is the toner density low?
• Is the copy paper fed straight? Is the copy paper abnormally moist?
• Is the rotation of the registration roller normal?
• Is the output of the transfer guide bias normal?
• Is the separation output different from the set value?
• Is the developer bias value an appropriate one?
• Are the transfer/separation charger case and the drum shaft grounded? Is the high-voltage trans-
former grounded?
• Is the transfer insulation film (transparent film attached to the transfer guide) damaged or deformed?
3.7.1 Carriages
[Front side]
Carriage-2
Carriage wire
Idler pulley
Bracket for carriage-1
Hook
Tension spring
Wire pulley
Fig. 3-32
[Rear side]
Carriage-2
Carriage wire
Hook
Wire pulley
Tension spring
Fig. 3-33
Adjustment of the carriage wire tension is not necessary since a certain tension is applied to the car-
riage wires by the tension springs.
Note:
Make sure the tension applied to the wire is normal.
[Rear] [Front]
Fig. 3-34
Carriage-1
[Rear] [Front]
Bracket Bracket
Fig. 3-35
(1) Pull the Ø3 ball terminal located at the center of the wire into a hole on the wire pulley. One end
of the wire with a hook attached comes to the outside.
(2) Wind the wires around the wire pulleys of the front and rear sides. The number of turns to be
wound are as follows:
• 2 turns toward the opposite side of the boss
• 4 turns toward the boss side
Note:
Pay attention to the following when the wires are wound around the pulleys:
- Do not twist the wire.
- Wind the wires tightly so that they are in complete contact with the surface of the pulleys.
- Each turn should be pushed against the previously wound turn so that there is no space 3
between them.
4 turns 4 turns
2 turns 2 turns
Ball terminal
Ball terminal
[Rear] [Front]
Fig. 3-36
Fig. 3-37
Fig. 3-38
• Handle the unit with care. Do not hold the lens and adjusted part (hold the unit as shown below).
Fig. 3-39
(1) Place a ruler on the original glass (in the primary scanning direction) and make a copy on A4/LT-
sized paper at 100% reproduction ratio.
Fig. 3-40
(3) If each mark on the rulers differs, perform the adjustment with the following procedures.
<Procedure>
Screw
Lens unit
Fig. 3-41
0.1% 0.5 mm
0.2% 0.9 mm
0.3% 1.4 mm
0.4% 1.8 mm
0.5% 2.3 mm 3
0.6% 2.7 mm
0.7% 3.2 mm
0.8% 3.6 mm
0.9% 4.1 mm
1.0% 4.5 mm
Lens unit
Fig. 3-42
Note:
Fine adjustment can be made in the “Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (printer)”
on the copied ruler and actual ruler match.
<Procedure>
• The center of the printed image shifts to the • The center of the printed image shifts to the
front side. → Move the guide to the front side rear side. → Move the guide to the rear side
(Arrow (A) direction in the lower figure). (Arrow (B) direction in the lower figure).
[Rear] [Rear]
[Front] [Front]
Fig. 3-47
Screw
Fig. 3-48
Screw
Fig. 3-49
Doctor blade
Fig. 3-50
Developer
sleeve
Doctor blade
Fig. 3-51
Toner scattering
prevention sheet
Fig. 3-52
3
Fig. 3-53
Fig. 3-54
Positioning
pin
Fig. 3-55
Fig. 3-56
Half turn
1 turn
3
Fig. 3-57
Fig. 3-58
Screw
Fig. 3-59
Fig. 3-60
Fig. 3-61
Fig. 3-62
3
Fig. 3-63
(10) Fit the hinge hole into the hole of the equip-
ment at the rear right of the RADF to tighten
the stepped screw. If they do not fit, adjust
the position of the hole by turning the screw
of the adjustment plate.
Fig. 3-64
Stepped Screw
Fig. 3-65
Fig. 3-66
Platen guide
Platen guide front holder
rear holder
0.5mm±0.3
0mm
Fig. 3-67
Fig. 3-68
Fig. 3-69
(1) Step 1
Case A: ................Adjust the aligning adjustment position to the rear side “-” of the original
(Chap. 3.10.5).
Case B: ................Adjust the aligning adjustment position to the rear side “+” of the original
(Chap. 3.10.5).
A B
White arrow: feeding direction 3
Paper
Original
Fig. 3-70
(2) Step 2
Case C: ................Loosen the fixing screw and hand screw of the right side hinge and then turn
the adjustment screw counterclockwise.
Case D: ................Loosen the fixing screw and hand screw of the right side hinge and then turn
the adjustment screw clockwise.
Note:
When adjusting, refer to the hinge position (scribed line) and be sure not to move it from the
hinge position ±0.5 mm or further. Otherwise, image failures such as a jitter may occur.
Fixing screw
C D
Adjustment screw
Paper
Hand screw
Original
RADF
Front side
Fig. 3-71
Fig. 3-72
Paper
Original
Fig. 3-73
Refer to P. 2-46 "2.2.5 Adjustment mode (05) (e-STUDIO350/450)" for the details.
Errors such as paper jamming may occur if the EEPROM is not initialized and the sensors are not
adjusted after the above mentioned parts were replaced.
Rear side "+" of the original + - Rear side "-" of the original
Skew of paper
Fig. 3-74
- paper
w of
+ Sk e
Fig. 3-75
<Procedure>
(1) Remove the screw on the left and take off the
plate spring. Plate spring
Fig. 3-76
Fig. 3-77
C A
Fig. 3-78
Flapper lever
Fig. 3-79
A
Glass surface
Center
Fig. 3-80
A
Glass surface
Center
Fig. 3-81
<Procedure>
Fig. 3-82
Fig. 3-83
[A] Checking
Fig. 3-84
Fig. 3-85
3
Fig. 3-86
[B] Adjustment
If the pins cannot be fitted into the holes, perform the adjustment according to the following procedure.
Fig. 3-87
Fig. 3-88
Fig. 3-89
Fig. 3-90
Fig. 3-91
3
Fig. 3-92
Fig. 3-93
Fig. 3-94
Fig. 3-95
Fig. 3-96
[A] Checking
0 mm
A A
B B
Fig. 3-97
Fig. 3-98
• Adjust the gap on the rear side by means of the screw on the hinge on the feed side of the
RADF.
Turn it clockwis .................... Lowered
Turn it counterclockwise ...... Heightened
Fig. 3-99
[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure.
Simplex copying:
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [1
Sided -> 1 Sided] and press the [START] button.
(2) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the inclination of the copy image.
Duplex copying:
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [2
Sided -> 2 Sided] and press the [START] button.
(2) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the inclination of the copy image.
(1) Shift the aligning plate with the scale as the guide shown in the figure below to adjust the skew.
Fig. 3-101
(2) If the image skew is "C" as shown in the figure below, shift the aligning plate in the direction of
"+", and if "D", shift it to "-".
Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "+". Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "-".
(1) Shift the aligning plate with the scale as the guide shown in the figure below to adjust the skew.
Fig. 3-104
(2) If the image skew is "C" as shown in the figure below, shift the aligning plate in the direction of "-
", and if "D", shift it to "+".
Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "-". Shift the aligning plate in the direction of "+".
[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure.
Simplex copying:
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [1
Sided -> 1 Sided] and press the [START] button.
(2) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the leading edge E of the chart and F of the copy.
Duplex copying:
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF, select [2
Sided -> 2 Sided] and press the [START] button.
(2) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the leading edge E of the chart and F of the copy.
E F
[B] Adjustment
Simplex copying:
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, key in [365] and then press the
[START] button.
(2) Enter the value.
• If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is larger than the (E) margin of the chart,
enter a value smaller than the current one.
Note:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.1 mm.
• If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is smaller than the (E) margin of the chart,
enter a value larger than the current one.
Note:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.1 mm.
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, key in [366] and then press the
[START] button.
(2) Enter the value.
• If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is larger than the (E) margin of the chart,
enter a value smaller than the current one.
Note:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.1 mm.
• If the leading edge (F) margin of the copy image is smaller than the (E) margin of the chart,
enter a value larger than the current one.
Note:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.1 mm. 3
(3) Press the [ENTER] button.
[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with a center line in the following procedure.
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF.
(2) Press the [START] button.
(3) Fold the copy in half and check if the center line is misaligned.
[B] Adjustment
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously.
(2) Key in [358] and then press the [START] button.
• If the center line of the copy image is shifted to the front side of the equipment, enter a value
larger than the current one.
Note:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.042 mm.
Fig. 3-109
• If the center line of the copy image is shifted to the rear side of the equipment, enter a value
smaller than the current one.
Fig. 3-110
[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure.
(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF.
(2) Press the [START] button.
(3) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the image dimension “I”.
[B] Adjustment 3
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously.
(2) Key in [357] and then press the [START] button.
• If the copy image dimension “I” is larger than the chart dimension, enter a value smaller than
the current one.
• If the copy image dimension “I” is smaller than the chart dimension, enter a value larger than
the current one.
I
Fig. 3-111
A
Fig. 3-112
Fig. 3-113
(1) Remove the right inner cover and the rear cover.
(2) Adjust the front jogging plate to the home position.
• Set SW1 on the finisher controller PC board as shown in Fig. 3-114.
• Press SW2 twice on the finisher controller PC board.
- The front jogging plate moves to the home position. 3
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 3-114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 3-115
Fig. 3-116
Fig. 3-117
(7) Adjust the position of the front jogging plate home position sensor (S6) with reference to the
index.
EX. 1
If the width is 319 mm in step (4), the difference from the standard is +2 mm, it requires relocation
of the sensor [3] in the direction of arrow A by 2 mm.
EX. 2If the width is 316 mm in step (4), the difference from the standard is -1 mm; it requires relo-
cation of the sensor [3] in the direction of arrow B by 1 mm.
Sensor
A B
Fig. 3-118
(1) Without removing the processing tray unit, loosen the 2 mounting screws of the rear jogging
plate.
Screw Rear jogging plate
Fig. 3-119
(2) Place several sheets of A4/LT paper on the processing tray, and adjust the rear jogging plate. (At
this time, adjust the gap between the paper and the front end of the rear jogging plate so that it is
0 mm to 0.5 mm.)
0 mm to 0.5 mm
Paper
Screw
Butted
Rear jogging
plate
(3) With reference to the rear jogging plate adjusted in step (2), adjust the front jogging plate in the
same manner.
Screw
Adjusting plate Jogging plate Adjusting plate
adjusting plate
Fig. 3-120
(3) Tighten the screw so that the overlap between the flag of the front/rear jogging rack plate and the
sensor is 1.5 mm to 2.0 mm.
Sensor Sensor flag
1.5 mm to 2.0 mm
Fig. 3-121
(1) Remove the right inner cover and the rear cover.
(2) Remove the 2 mounting screws, and detach the grip unit.
Grip unit
Screw Screw
Fig. 3-122
(3) Loosen the screw on the tension arm plate. (The tension arm plate will be pulled under tension
by the tension spring.)
Screw
Tension arm plate
Fig. 3-123
Fig. 3-124
(5) Check to make sure that the returning roller shaft moves smoothly.
Returning
roller shaft
Fig. 3-125
(1) Remove the right inner cover and the rear cover.
(2) Remove the finisher control PC board, PC board bracket and sensor PC board.
(3) Remove the stack tray.
(4) Remove the stack tray drive unit.
(5) Place the stack tray guide lever fixing plate so that it is in view through the hole in the side plate
(front, rear). Then remove the fixing screw. (Perform the same for the front and the rear.)
Screw
Fig. 3-126
Note:
When removing the mounting screw, be sure to hold the stack tray guide lever up from below.
Stack tray
guide lever
Fig. 3-127
Fig. 3-128
Fig. 3-129
Fig. 3-130
(4) After the height adjustment, tighten the fixing screw of the bracket.
Note:
If the fixing screw of the bracket is not fixed, the belt is loosened which may cause a skipped
tooth.
Fig. 3-131
Initiating Operations
1) Remove any obstacles from the area of operation.
2) Set the DIP switch (SW1) as shown, and turn ON the power (so that LED1 will start to blink).
3) Press the pushing switch (SW2) twice to initiate the operation in question. (LED2 will remain on dur-
ing operation).
Setting Item Operation To stop
ON Delivery motor The delivery roller rotates in a specific speed. • Press SW2 again.
• Turn OFF the joint
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
sensor (S4).
ON Stack process- The stack delivery lever moves to its home • Turn OFF the joint
ing motor (stack position and stops. sensor (S4).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
delivery lever)
ON Stack process- The returning roller moves to the home posi- • Turn OFF the joint
ing motor tion and stops. sensor (S4).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(returning roller)
ON Front jogging When not at the The front jogging plate • Turn OFF the joint
plate motor home position moves to its home position sensor (S4).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
and stops.
When at the The front jogging plate • Turn OFF the joint
home position moves over a specific posi- sensor (S4).
tion and stops at the home
position.
ON Rear jogging When not at the The rear jogging plate • Turn OFF the joint
plate motor home position moves to the home posi- sensor (S4).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 tion and stops.
When at the The rear jogging plate • Turn OFF the joint
home position moves over a specific dis- sensor (S4).
tance and stops.
ON Upper stack tray The upper stack tray moves up and stops • Press SW2 again.
motor (up) when the upper stack tray upper limit sensor • Turn OFF the joint
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
turns ON. sensor (S4).
ON Upper stack tray The upper stack tray moves down and stops • Press SW2 again.
motor (down) when the lower stack tray lower limit sensor • Turn OFF the joint
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
turns ON. sensor (S4).
ON Lower stack tray The lower stack tray moves up and stops • Press SW2 again.
motor (up) when the lower stack tray upper limit sensor is • Turn OFF the joint
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
turned ON. sensor (S4).
ON Lower stack tray The lower stack tray moves down and stops • Press SW2 again.
motor (down) when the lower stack tray lower limit sensor is • Turn OFF the joint
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
turned ON. sensor (S4).
ON Stapler motor The stapler motor stops after the stapling • Press the stapler
operation. safety switch (S14).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
• Turn OFF the joint
sensor (S4).
ON Shipping posi- The upper and lower stack trays move to the • Turn OFF the joint
tion operation shipping position and stop. sensor (S4).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Note:
Perform the shipping position operation when the finisher is packed again.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A4 paper LT paper
Fig. 3-132
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A4/front stitch A4/rear stitch
ON ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A4-R/front stitch A4-R/rear stitch
ON ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LT/front stitch LT/rear stitch
ON ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LT-R/front stitch LT-R/rear stitch
Fig. 3-133
(8) Press SW101 or SW102 on the finisher controller PC board to adjust the staple position.
• When SW101 is pressed, the staple position shifts 0.49 mm to the front side.
• When SW102 is pressed, the staple position shifts 0.49 mm to the rear side.
Repeat the steps 5) to 7).
(1) Check that the power is OFF and separate the finisher from the host machine.
If the optional puncher unit is installed, remove it from the finisher.
(2) Remove the PC board cover and set bits 1 through 4 of SW504 on the saddle stitcher controller
PC board as follows:
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Do not change bits 5 through 8.
Fig. 3-134
(3) Remove the rear cover, open the inlet cover of the saddle stitcher unit and tape the actuator of
inlet cover sensor (PI9) and inlet door switch (SW1).
(4) Before inserting the paper, mark the top of the paper. You will be using two sheets of A3 or LD
paper.
Mark
A3/LD paper
Insert direction
Fig. 3-135
Mark Mark
3
Folding position Stitching position
L
L
Unit: mm Unit: mm
Example: If L is 1 mm, provide "+1 mm". Example: If L is 0.5 mm, provide "-0.5 mm".
(11) Change the settings of bits 6 through 8 on SW504 referring to the following table.
• If the width adjustment is 0
The stitching position and the folding position match, requiring no change.
• If for “positive width adjustment”
Set SW504 so that the difference resulting from subtraction of the interval from the appropri-
ate setting in the table below is provided.
Example: If SW504 is currently set to +2 and the interval is +1 mm, set SW504 to reflect - 2.
• If for “negative width adjustment”
Set SW504 so that the sum resulting from addition of the interval from the appropriate setting
in the table below is provided.
Example: If SW504 is currently set to -1 and the interval is -0.5mm, set SW504 to reflect +1.
Increase the adjustment value when the sheet of paper which has exited is "A".
Decrease the adjustment value when the sheet of paper which has exited is "B".
A: When the upper side of the folding is longer B: When the upper side of the folding is shorter
than the lower side than the lower side
(1) Check that the power is OFF and then remove the rear cover of the puncher.
(2) Set SW601 on the punch controller PC board as shown below.
ON
1 2 3 4
Fig. 3-136
3
(3) Turn ON the power.
(4) Press SW602 on the punch controller PC board. Sensor output is adjusted automatically when
the switch is pressed.
• Adjustment is complete if LED601 and LED602 on the punch controller PC board blinksalter-
nately.
(5) Press SW602 or SW603 on the punch controller PC board to end the adjustment mode and set
all bits of SW601 to OFF.
(6) Turn OFF the power.
(1) Check that the power is OFF and then remove the rear cover of the puncher.
(2) Set SW601 on the punch controller PC board as shown below.
ON
1 2 3 4
Fig. 3-137
(5) Press SW603 on the punch controller PC board. The number of punch holes is registered to the
punch controller PC board each time the switch is pressed.
• Registration is complete if LED601 and LED602 on the punch controller PC board blinks
alternately.
(6) Press SW602 or SW603 on the punch controller PC board to end the adjustment mode and set
all bits of SW601 to OFF.
(7) Turn OFF the power.
(3) Set the SW1 on the Finisher control board as shown in the figures below.
Access cover
SW1
Fig. 3-138
ON ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Fig. 3-139
(4) Turn ON the power of the equipment while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
The alignment plate moves to the A4 or LT size position and stops.
(It stops at the position of -5 steps from the center value of the adjustment range.)
Button1 Button2
Fig. 3-140
(6) When the adjustment is completed, press the [Button2] on the finisher control panel to store the
adjustment value in memory.
When the value is stored normally, the [LED1] on the control panel will blink for a number of times
that corresponds to the adjustment value set for the equipment.
See the following table for the number of times the [LED1] blinks and its corresponding adjust-
ment value.
(8) Turn OFF all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher control board.
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the board access cover.
(3) Set the SW1 on the Finisher control board as shown in the figures below.
SW1
Fig. 3-141
ON ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ON ON
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Fig. 3-142
(4) Turn ON the power of the equipment while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
The alignment plate moves to the rear or front side stapling position and stops. (It stops at the
position of -20 steps from the center value of the adjustment range.)
Button1 Button2
Fig. 3-143
(6) When the adjustment is completed, press [Button 2] on the finisher control panel to store the
adjustment value in memory without sheets on the finishing tray.
When the value is stored normally, [LED 1] on the control panel will blink for a number of times
that corresponds to the adjustment value set for the equipment.
See the following table for the number of times [LED 1] blinks and its corresponding adjustment
value.
(8) Turn OFF all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher control board.
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the board access cover.
(3) Set the SW1 on the Finisher control board as shown in the figures below.
Access cover
SW1
Fig. 3-144
ON
1 2 3 4
Fig. 3-145
(4) Turn ON the power of the equipment while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Note:
Be sure to press [Button1] and [Button2] the correct number of times.
Press [Button1] and [Button2] simultaneously to cancel the operation.
Button1 Button2
Fig. 3-146
B4-size recycled paper mode
Step Buttons Number of pressing Remarks
1 Button1 1
3 Button1 8
Note:
To change settings from the B4-size recycled paper mode to the normal mode, perform steps (1)
through (4), and then press [Button1] and [Button2] on the control panel as shown below to set
the normal mode.
Normal mode
Step Buttons Number of pressing Remarks
1 Button1 1
3 Button1 6
(6) When the settings are stored normally, [LED1] on the control panel is lit. [LED1] blinks, if an error
occurs. In this case, turn the power OFF and make the settings again from step (4).
(8) Turn OFF all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher control board.
(2) Take off the board access cover of the Finisher. Then set SW1 (DIP-SW) on the finisher control
PC board as shown below.
SW1
ON
1 2 3 4
Fig. 3-147
(3) Turn the power of the equipment ON. The finisher enters into the stopping position adjustment
mode.
(4) LED1 on the finisher control panel blinks. The number of times it blinks indicates the current
adjustment value.
Note:
When the adjustment value goes further in minus numbers in the table above, the distance
between the paper edge and the holes becomes wider. When it goes further in plus numbers,
this distance becomes narrower.
Fig. 3-148
(6) When the value change is completed, press Button2 on the finisher control panel to determine
the adjustment value. (The adjustment value is written into the flash ROM.)
(8) Turn all the bits of SW1 (DIP-SW) on the finisher control PC board OFF.
Counter socket
MU-10
3
<Installation procedure>
IH terminal
cover
Fig. 3-149
Dummy connector
Harness
connector
Fig. 3-150
Screw
Fig. 3-151
Fig. 3-152
Since adjustment has usually been performed when the equipment was manufactured, dogleg image
should not occur. However, if the following dogleg image A or B does happen to occur, the following
adjustment must be performed. An original with a line parallel to the feeding direction is used for the
adjustment.
Normal Image
Feeding
Direction
3
Fig. 3-153
Feeding Feeding
Direction Direction
Approx. 44 mm of Approx. 44 mm of
the trailing edge the trailing edge
Fig. 3-156
<Adjustment procedure>
Scale
Fig. 3-157
(4) Check the copy image and repeat Step 1 to 3
if further adjustment is needed..
Clear finished
Fig. 4-1
* The screen goes back to the main screen when the counter clear is executed or the [CANCEL]
button is pressed after moving from the main screen, while it goes back to the sub screen after
moving from the sub screen.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 4-2
2 3 4 5 6 7
Fig. 4-3 4
5 Displaying of the standard number of output pages counts (x1,000) to replace the sub unit
(parts)
7 Displaying of the standard number of drive counts (x1,000) to replace the sub unit (parts)
8 Displaying of the number of output pages counts, drive counts and previous replacement date
for a chosen sub unit
Fig. 4-4
1 When the [INITIALIZE] button is pressed, “Present number of output pages counts” and
Present driving counts” are cleared and “Previous replacement date” is updated.
Transfer /separation charger unit Transfer charger wire [TRANSFER CHARGER WIRE]
[TRANS./SEP.CHARGER] Separation charger wire [SEPARATION CHARGER WIRE]
Example 1:
When the number of output pages has reached the specified level
• The parts in RADF • The parts in the drum/cleaner unit
• The parts in feeding system • The parts in the fuser unit
• The parts in the developer unit
• The parts in the transfer/separation charger unit
No
Fig. 4-5
Example 2:
When the image failure occurred before the number of output pages has reached the specified
level
Yes
Does it exceed the specified drive count? Replace the part.
No
Fig. 4-6
Fig. 4-7
• Turn OFF the power and make sure to unplug the equipment.
(2) Perform a preventive maintenance using the following checklist and illustrations. Refer to the
Service Manual if necessary.
(3) Plug in the equipment after the maintenance has been finished. Then turn ON the power and
make some copies to confirm that the equipment is working properly.
A: Clean with alcohol L: Launa 40 The number of O: After cleaning User Name
D: Clean with a well sheets con- or replace-
squeezed cloth Coating sumed before ment, confirm Sirial No.
O: Clean with soft pad, replacement there is no
cloth or vacuum SI: Silicon oil (Value x 1,000) problem. Inspector's name
cleaner W1: White grease R: Replace if
(Molykote X5-6020) Remarks
deformed or
W2: White grease damaged
(Molykote HP-300)
W3: White grease
(Molykote EM-30L)
AV: Alvania No.2
FL Floil
(GE-334C)
CG: Conductive grease
(KS-660)
A. Scanner
Replacement Operation Parts list
Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Remarks
(x1,000 sheets) check <P-I>
A1 Original glass O or A *a1
A2 ADF original glass O *a1
A3 Mirror-1 O
A4 Mirror-2 O
A5 Mirror-3 O
A6 Reflector O
A7 Lens O
A8 Exposure lamp R O
A9 Automatic original O O
detection sensor
A10 Slide sheet O or A R
(front and rear)
B. Laser unit
Replacement Operation Parts list
Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Remarks
(x1,000 sheets) check <P-I>
B1 Slit glass O
4
D. Automatic duplexing unit
Replacement Operation Parts list
Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Remarks
(x1,000 sheets) check <P-I>
D1 Transport roller (upper, A R
middle and lower)
D2 One side of the GCB L
bushing to which the
shaft is inserted
D3 One side of the plastic W1
bushing to which the
shaft is inserted
D4 Paper guide O
J. Developer unit
Replacement Operation Parts list
Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Remarks
(x1,000 sheets) check <P-I>
J3 Front shield O R
J5 Guide roller O or A R
K. Fuser unit
Replacement Operation Parts list
Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Remarks
(x1,000 sheets) check <P-I>
K1 Fuser roller 120/150 P103-I2
K2 Pressure roller 120/150 P103-I2
K3 Separation finger for 120/150 P103-I2 *k1
fuser roller
K4 Separation finger for R *k1
pressure roller
K5 Cleaning roller 120/150 P103-I2
K6 One side of the clean- SI
ing roller to which the
shaft is inserted
K7 Thermistor (2pcs.) A R *k2
K8 Fuser unit entrance A
guide
K9 Exit / reverse guide A
K10 Exit roller A R
K11 Drive gear SI
M. PFP (KD-1011)
Replacement Operation Parts list
Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Remarks
(x1,000 sheets) check <P-I>
M1 Pickup roller 80/80 P5-I29
(upper/lower)
M2 Feed roller 80/80 P5-I26
(upper/lower)
M3 Separation roller AV, W2 80/80 P5-I12 *m1
(upper/lower)
M4 Drive gear (tooth face) W1
N. LCF (KD-1012)
Replacement Operation Parts list
Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Remarks
(x1,000 sheets) check <P-I>
N1 Pickup roller A 160/160 P4-I30
N2 Feed roller A 160/160 P4-I28
N3 Separation roller A 160/160 P5-I12
N4 Drive gear W1
Q. Drive system
Replacement Operation Parts list
Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Remarks
(x1,000 sheets) check <P-I>
Q1 Main motor drive W1
unit gear
S. Finisher (MJ-1101)
Replacement Operation Parts list
Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Remarks
(x1,000) check (P-I)
S1 Stack transport roller-1 A
S2 Stack transport roller-2 A
S3 Buffer roller A
S4 Exit roller A
S5 Entrance roller A
S6 Transport roller A
S7 Paddle 1,000
S8 Paper holder cam W3 *s1
S9 Buffer tray shaf W3 *s2
S10 Stapler carrier shaft W3 *s3
S11 Rack & pinion gear W3 *s4
(Aligning plate)
S12 Movable tray drive gear W3 *s5
S13 Buffer tray guide W3 *s6
S14 Finishing tray shaft W3 *s7
A5 A3 A9 K10 K3 K9 K4 K2 K5,K6 H6
D1
F2,F4 K7 K1 K8
F1 F5 H7 G5
H4 H5
H3 G6
G1
H1 H8
D1
G3
B1 G2 4
G4
J5
C9
J2
C9
I1
D1 E4
J1 C1
C2
C3 E1
E2
E3
C1
C2 C4
C3
J4
L5 L4 L2 L3 L1
L6
L8
L7
M3
M2
M3
M1
4
Fig. 4-11 Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP)
N1 N2
N3
O6
O3
O1
O2
O4
P4
P1
P3
P2
P6
P5
R6 R7 R8 R10 R11
4
S3 S8 S9 S4
S14
S12
S2
S5
S6
S11 S7
S13
S1
S10
* c2. Drive gears in the paper feeding section (teeth of gears and shafts)
Apply some white grease (Molykote X5-6020) to the teeth of gears and shafts of the drive
gears.
Note:
Make sure that oil is not running over or scattered around as the gear is rotated coming into the
clutch after applying Molykote to the gear which is located near the clutch. The quantity of
Molykote should be smaller than that to be applied to the other parts.
Fig. 4-19
Fig. 4-20
During replacement, coat the oil seal with grease (Alvanian No.2).
(1) Push in a new oil seal parallel to the mount- Developer frame
ing hole section of the developer frame or (Nozzle mixer)
outside of the nozzle mixer.
* Pay attention to the direction in which the
oil seal is attached. (See figure on right.) Outside
(2) Apply an even coat of grease to the inside of
the oil seal.
• Amount: About two small drops
(3) Wipe off any grease the exudes from the Inside Grease
inside.
Oil seal
Fig. 4-21
Fig. 4-22
Fig. 4-23
Fig. 4-24
Fig. 4-25
4
Fig. 4-26
Rack gear
Pinion gear
Fig. 4-27
Gear B
Gear A
Fig. 4-28
Fig. 4-29
Parts list
Item
Page Item
Door switch jig 101 1
Brush 101 4
Downloading jig (DLM board) 102 1
Wire holder jig 101 9
Current measuring jig 101 5
Jig detection connector 101 2
Download JIG-2 (6 Flash ROMs) 102 7
Download JIG-1 (2 Flash ROMs) 102 2
ROM writer adapter (For 1881) 102 3
ROM writer adapter (For 1931) 102 4
Doctor-sleeve jig 101 5
Blade releasing jig 101 3
Developer material nozzle 101 8
Parts list
Grease name Part name Volume Container
Page Item
2) Photoconductive drum
Like the toner and developer, photoconductive drum should be stored in a dark place where the
ambient temperature is between 10°C to 35°C (no condensation). Be sure to avoid places where
drums may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
4) Fuser roller
Avoid places where the rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
5) Cleaning roller
Avoid places where the rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.
They should also be stored “horizontally” on a flat surface.
6) Paper
Avoid storing paper in places where it may be subjected to high humidity.
After a package is opened, be sure to place and store it in a storage bag.
2) Handling precautions
As the photoconductive drum surface is very sensitive, be sure to handle the drum carefully when
installing and removing it so as not damage its surface.
Be sure to apply “patting powder” (lubricant) to the entire surface of the drum (including both ends of
the drum where OPC is not coated) when replacing the drum. Also, apply conductive grease (KS-
660) to the circumference of the drum shaft and the entire inner surface of the flange on the drum
rear side, referring to the figures below. When the drum has been replaced with a new one, the drum
counter (the Setting Mode 08-1150-0,3,6 and 7) must be cleared to 0 (zero).
This clearing can be performed in the PM Support Mode.
10mm 4
7mm
Notes:
1. Application of patting powder is for reducing the friction between the drum and cleaning blade.
If the application of patting powder is neglected, the drum and cleaning blade may be dam-
aged.
2. When paper fibers or thread adhere to the cleaning blade edge, they may reduce the cleaning
efficiency and, in addition, may damage the blade and the drum. Be sure to remove any fibers
found adhering to the blade.
3. When the cleaner unit has been assembled, wipe off the grease adhering to the head of the
drum shaft with a piece of cloth.
2) Cleaning procedure
Clean the blade edge with a cloth moistened with water and squeezed lightly.
(2) Checking
• Check for stain and damage on the fuser and pressure rollers, and clean if necessary.
• Check the separation guide and fingers and check for chipped tips.
• Check the cleaning effect of the cleaning roller.
• Check the thermistors for proper contact with the pressure roller.
• Check the fused and fixed condition of the toner.
• Check the gap between the entrance guide and pressure roller.
• Check the fuser roller for proper rotation.
Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors and covers (If a jam is occurring in
the ADU, LCF, PFP, JSP or OCT check the board in each unit.)
[E200] Paper fed from the upper drawer not reaching the registration sensor
[E210] Paper fed from the lower drawer not reaching the registration sensor
[E300] Paper fed from the PFP upper drawer not reaching the registration sensor
[E330] Paper fed from the PFP lower drawer not reaching the registration sensor
[E3C0] Paper fed from the LCF not reaching the registration sensor
Open the jam access cover. Is there paper in front of the registration sensor?
| YES Æ Remove the paper.
È
NO
Is the registration sensor working?
(Perform the input check in the test mode: 03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[A]
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected.
| 2) Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
| 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
| circuited.
| 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
| circuited. 5
|
5) Replace the registration sensor.
|
| 6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
Are the transport clutches (high/low speed) working?
(Perform the output check in the test mode: 03-203, 205)
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connectors of the transport clutches (high/low speed) are dis-
| connected.
| 2) Check if the connector CN306 on the LGC board is disconnected.
| 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open
| circuited.
| 4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
| 5) Replace the transport clutches (high/low speed).
| 6) Replace the LGC board.
È
YES
1) Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper
source, and replace them if they are worn out.
2) Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.
Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors/covers (If a jam is occurring in the
ADU, LCF, PFP, JSP or OCT check the board in each unit.)
5
Jamming area Cover Sensor Test mode / Input check
Registration area Jam access cover Registration sensor 03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[A]
Upper drawer feed sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[6]/[E]
Exit area Jam access cover Exit sensor 03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[B]
ADU ADU ADU entrance sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[H]
ADU exit sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[1]/[G]
Bypass unit Bypass unit Bypass feed sensor 03-[FAX]ON/[4]/[F]
Feeding area Side cover Lower drawer feed sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[E]
(Main unit)
LCF LCF side cover LCF feed sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[G]
PFP PFP side cover PFP upper drawer feed sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D]
PFP lower drawer feed sensor 03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[D]
Bridge unit Bridge unit Bridge unit transport sensor-1 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H]
Bridge unit transport sensor-2 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[E]
JSP JSP cover JSP feed sensor 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H
OCT OCT cover OCT feed sensor 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H]
Finisher Finisher door Sensors in the finisher -
In case the paper is fed from the lower drawer, PFP or LCF:
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the upper drawer feed sensor?
| YES Æ Remove the paper.
È
NO
Are the upper/lower drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check in the test mode:
03-[FAX]OFF/[6]/[E], /[7]/[E])
| NO Æ 1) Check if the connector of the upper/lower drawer feed sensor is discon-
| nected.
| 2) Check if the connector CN318 on the LGC board is disconnected.
| 3) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open
| circuited.
|
4) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open
|
circuited.
|
| 5) Replace the upper/lower drawer feed sensor.
È 6) Replace the LGC board.
YES
Check the rollers. Replace them if they are worn out.
MJ-1023/1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
È YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the connector J708 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? 5
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI33) open cir-
cuited?
È YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
| NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.
| 2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.
| 3) Replace the inlet sensor.
È
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1023/1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
È YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is any of the connectors (J707, J708 and J722B) on the finisher controller PC board discon-
nected?
Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and each sensor (the inlet sensor 5
[PI33], the transport path sensor [PI34], the processing tray sensor [PI38]) open circuited?
È YES Æ Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses.
NO
Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, the transport path sensor and processing tray sensor)
working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
| NO Æ 1) Connect the connectors of the sensors securely.
| 2) Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place.
È 3) Replace the sensors.
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1101
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
È ÆYES Remove the paper.
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the transport
sensor (S2)?
l ÆYES • Connect the connector securely.
l • Reinstall the sensor correctly.
È • Replace the sensor.
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.
MJ-1023/1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher?
È YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is any of the connectors J707, J708 and J722B on the finisher controller PC board discon-
nected? 5
Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and each sensor (the inlet sensor
[PI33], the transport path sensor [PI34], the processing tray sensor [PI38], open circuited?
È YES Æ Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses.
NO
Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, the transport path sensor and the processing tray sen-
sor) working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
| NO Æ 1) Connect the connectors of the sensors securely.
| 2) Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place.
| 3) Replace the sensors.
È
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1023/1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment or on the sta-
pling tray?
È YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staple
sheet slid from the staple case?
È YES Æ End.
NO
Is the connector J721B on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and staple home position sensor
(PI40) open circuited?
È YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the staple home position sensor working properly?
| NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the staple home position sensor securely.
| 2) Replace the staple home position sensor.
È
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1023/1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
È YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the connector J708 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected?
Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI33) open cir-
cuited?
È YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.)
| NO Æ 1) Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely.
| 2) Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place.
| 3) Replace the inlet sensor.
È
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1101
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment?
È ÆYES Remove the paper.
NO
Is there a disconnection of the connector, incorrect installation or breakage of the entrance
sensor (S1)?
l ÆYES • Connect the connector securely.
l • Reinstall the sensor correctly.
È • Replace the sensor.
NO
Is the harness between the entrance sensor (S1) and the finisher control PC board (CN7) dis-
connected or open circuited?
l ÆYES • Reconnect the connector securely.
È • Replace the harness.
NO
Replace the finisher control PC board.
5
[EA90] Door open jam
MJ-1024
Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher, saddle stitcher section or
equipment?
È YES Æ Remove the paper.
NO
Is the saddle stitcher door closed?
È NO Æ Close the door.
YES
Is either of the connectors J10 or J11 on saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected?
Are the harnesses between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and cover opening sensors
(delivery cover sensor [PI3], inlet cover sensor [PI9]) open circuited?
È YES Æ Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO
Is each of the sensors (delivery cover sensor, inlet cover sensor) working properly?
| NO Æ 1) Connect the connectors of the each sensor securely.
| 2) Replace the sensors.
È
YES
Replace the finisher controller PC board.
Remove the original glass and move the carriages to the paper feeding side. Turn ON the power and
check the following items.
[C270] Are the carriages slightly moved to the feeding direction? Are the carriages staying at a posi-
tion other than home position?
YES Æ 1) Check if the connector of the scan motor is disconnected.
2) Check if the connector pin is disconnected and the harness is short cir-
È
cuited or open circuited.
3) Replace the SLG board.
NO
1) Check if the connector pin is disconnected and the harness is short circuited or open cir-
cuited.
2) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
3) Replace the SLG board.
[C280] Do the carriages make a big noise after they arrive at the home position?
| YES Æ The carriage home position sensor is not turned ON.
| 1) Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected.
| 2) Replace the carriage home position sensor.
È 3) Replace the SLG board.
NO
The carriages are stopped at the home position and do not move.
1) Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are short circuited or
open circuited.
2) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
3) Replace the SLG board.
CAUTION
Be sure to turn OFF the power and unplug the power cable beforehand when checking the IH control cir-
cuit and IH coil.
The fuser unit itself or the part of the unit remains heated and the capacitors are still charged after a while
the power cable is unplugged. So make sure the unit is cooled down enough before checking.
(1) Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
(2) Key in "400", then press [START].
(3) Change the current status counter value "1" or "2" to "0", then press [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT]
(to cancel [C410]).
(4) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Make sure that the equipment enters the normal ready
state.
* The status counter value is as follows in the following cases. Change them to "0" respectively.
• The error occurred immediately after the power was turned ON: "10"
• The error occurred before the temperature of the fuser roller reaches 40°C: "11" 5
• The error occurred before the equipment has become ready: "14"
• The error occurred when the equipment is in the ready state or during printing: "17"
(1) Check if the IGBT or IGBT radiation plate are normal. (Is the radiation plate securely attached?)
(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short circuited or open circuited.
(3) Replace the IH board.
* The status counter value is as follows in the following cases. Change them to "0" respectively.
• The error occurred before the temperature of the fuser roller reaches 40°C: "12"
• The error occurred before the equipment has become ready: "15"
• The error occurred when the equipment is in the ready state or during printing: "18"
(1) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short circuited or open circuited.
(2) Replace the IH board.
* The status counter value is as follows in the following cases. Change them to "0" respectively.
• The error occurred before the temperature of the fuser roller reaches 40°C: "13"
• The error occurred before the equipment has become ready: "16"
• The error occurred when the equipment is in the ready state or during printing: "19"
[C470], [C480] and [C490] can be cleared by turning OFF and ON the power as long as the problem
was solved, and the status counter does not have to be changed to "0". The value of the status
counter remains until the next service call overwrites the value.
(1) Check if the harness connecting the RADF board and SLG board is disconnected or open cir-
cuited.
(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short circuited or open circuited.
(3) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short circuited or open circuited.
(4) Replace the RADF board.
(5) Replace the SLG board.
(1) Check if the LGC board and IPC board are connected properly.
(2) Check if the conductor pattern on the IPC board is short circuited or open circuited.
(3) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short circuited or open circuited.
(4) Replace the IPC board.
(5) Replace the LGC board.
(1) Check if the harness connecting the SYS board (CN117) and LGC board (CN321) is discon-
nected or open circuited.
(2) Check the version of the system ROM on the SYS board.
(3) Check the version of the engine ROM version on the LGC board.
(4) Replace the SYS board.
(5) Replace the LGC board.
(1) Check if the harness connecting the SYS board and SLG board is disconnected or open cir-
cuited.
(2) Check the version of the system ROM on the SYS board.
(3) Check the version of the scanner ROM version on the SLG board.
(4) Replace the SYS board.
(5) Replace the SLG board.
(1) Check the RADF board, mainly IC12, for short circuits and open circuits.
(2) Replace the RADF board.
(1) Check if there is any foreign matter between the reverse sensor and the reflecting mirror. Check
if the reflecting mirror is dirty.
(2) Check if the harness connecting the reverse sensor and the RADF board is open circuited.
(3) Check the circuits and connectors on the RADF board, mainly IC3, IC4 and CN4, for short cir-
cuits and open circuits.
(4) Replace the reverse sensor.
(5) Replace the RADF board.
(1) Check if there is any foreign matter between the read sensor and the reflecting mirror. Check if
the reflecting mirror is dirty.
(2) Check if the harness connecting the read sensor and the RADF board is open circuited.
(3) Check the circuits and connectors on the RADF board, mainly IC3, IC4 and CN6, for short cir-
cuits and open circuits.
(4) Replace the read sensor.
(5) Replace the RADF board.
(1) Check if there is any foreign matter between the original length sensor and reflecting mirror.
Check if the reflecting mirror is dirty.
(2) Check if the harness connecting the original length sensor and the RADF board is open circuited.
(3) Check the circuits and connectors on the RADF board, mainly IC3, IC4 and CN3, for short cir-
cuits and open circuits.
(4) Replace the original length sensor.
(5) Replace the RADF board.
MJ-1101
Is there any mechanical problem when the stapler is moved?
È ÆYES Fix the mechanism.
NO
Is the harness between the stapler unit shift motor (M4) and the finisher control PC board
(CN5) disconnected or open circuited?
l ÆYES • Reconnect the connector securely.
È • Replace the harness.
NO
1) Replace the stapler unit shift motor (M4).
2) Replace the finisher control PC board.
5
[CBA0] Saddle stitcher stitch motor (front) abnormality
[CBB0] Saddle stitcher stitch motor (rear) abnormality
MJ-1024
Are the front and rear stitchers and their stands installed properly?
È NO Æ Install them properly.
YES
Are the stitcher home position switches (SW7/SW5) on the front and rear stitchers and stitcher
motors (M7/M6) working normally?
È NO Æ Replace the front or rear stitcher.
YES
Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
[Procedure 2]
Does the bushing attached to the returning roller shaft smoothly move up and down?
| NO Æ Apply grease on the cut-out part of the front side frame where the bushing con-
È tacts.
YES
Is the spring of the returning roller detached?
È YESÆ Attach the spring.
NO
Is the tension of the stack processing motor drive belt normal?
È NO Æ Loosen the adjustment screw to adjust its tension.
YES
Is the returning roller home position sensor (S3) working properly?
È NO Æ Replace the sensor.
YES
1) Replace the stack delivery motor.
2) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
(1) Check if each connector between the OCT motor and OCT board (CN261) is disconnected.
(2) Check if each connector between the OCT board (CN261) and LGC board (CN302) is discon- 5
nected.
(3) Check if each connector pin is removed or the harness is broken.
(4) Check if any conductor pattern on the OCT board and LGC board is short circuited or open cir-
cuited.
(5) Replace the OCT motor.
(6) Replace the OCT board.
(7) Replace the LGC board.
(1) Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
(2) When the message "SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE?" is displayed on the LCD, press [INI-
TIALIZE]. (SRAM is cleared.)
(3) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the SYS board.
(1) Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
(2) When the message "NVRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE?" is displayed on the LCD, press the
[INTERRUPT] or [INITIALIZE] button. (NVRAM is initialized.)
(3) Perform the panel calibration (08-692).
Note:
When the NVRAM is initialized, the scanner and image processing related adjustments are also
initialized. Readjust them after the NVRAM initialization.
(4) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the NVRAM on the
SYS board.
(1) Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
(2) When the message "NVRAM/SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE?" is displayed on the LCD,
press the [INTERRUPT] or [INITIALIZE] button. (SRAM is cleared and NVRAM is initialized.)
(3) Perform the panel calibration (08-692).
Note:
When the NVRAM is initialized, the scanner and image processing related adjustments are also
initialized. Readjust them after the NVRAM initialization.
(4) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the NVRAM on the
SYS board.
(1) Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08).
(2) Key in “662” and press the [START] button. (Partition clearing is performed.)
(3) Restart the equipment.
(4) Access TopAccess. Click the [Administration] tab, and then click the Maintenance Menu to open.
Then install the “Point and Print” driver.
Compare the serial number of the equipment with a number displayed in 08-995. If they are different, 5
enter the correct serial number at 08-995.
* When the Data overwrite kit (GP-1050) is removed from the equipment, the service call “F200”
occurs.
Check the system ROM version (08-900) since the countermeasure to be taken varies.
Earlier than T364SY0*329 (* represents a letter of the alphabet corresponding to the destination.)
Clear the service call “F200”. (Key in “0” at 08-633.)
* When the Data overwrite kit (GP-1060) is removed from the equipment, the service call “F200”
occurs.
Notes:
1. When initializing the Electronic Filing (Setting Mode (08-666)), all data in the Electronic
Filing are erased. Back up the data in the Electronic Filing by using the Electronic Filing
Function of TopAccess before the initialization.
2. When initializing the shared folder (Setting Mode (08-667)), all data in the shared folder
are erased. Back up the data in the shared folder by using Explorer before the initializa-
tion.
3. When formatting the HDD (Setting Mode (08-690)), all data in the shared folder, Electronic
Filing, Address Book, template, etc. are erased. Back up these data before the initializa-
tion. Note that some of data cannot be backed up (Page 5-1).
[1C80] Internet FAX transmission failure when processing E-mail job received
Reset the "Received InternetFax Forward".
[1C82] Internet FAX transmission failure when processing FAX job received
Reset the "Received Fax Forward".
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.
[2B32] Electronic Filing printing failure: Specified document can not be printed because of
client's access (being edited, etc.)
Check if the specified document exists. (If no, this error would not occur.)
Delete the specified document.
Perform the job in error again.
If the specified document can not be deleted, initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-
666).
[2BA1] A paper size not supported in the Electronic Filing function is being selected.
Check the paper size.
5
[2C65] SMTP address unset
Reset the SMTP address and perform the job.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then perform the HDD formatting (08-
690).
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.
Feeding direction
A B
Feeding direction
5
Moire
Defective area Step Check items Prescription
Density reproduc- 1 Check the reproduction of the image Adjust the density.
tion density.
Parameter adjust- 2 Check the image processing param- Check the adjustment value for sharpness.
ment value eters.
Printer section 3 Check test print image (04-113). When defects occur, perform the corre-
sponding troubleshooting procedure.
Lack of sharpness
Defective area Step Check items Prescription
Density reproduc- 1 Check the reproduction of the image Adjust the density.
tion density.
Parameter adjust- 2 Check the image processing param- Check the adjustment value for sharpness.
ment value eters.
Printer section 3 Check test print image (04-113). When defects occur, perform the corre-
sponding troubleshooting procedure.
4 Check the image processing param- Check the encircled areas A and B in the
eters. image, and change the sharpness intensity
in the sharpness adjustment mode.
Approx.124mm
Feeding direction
Toner offset (Shadow image appears approx. 124 mm toward the dark image.)
Defective area Step Check items Prescription
Density 1 Is the density too high? Adjust the density.
Fuser unit 2 Is the pressure of the fuser roller Check the pressure releasing parts and
normal? pressurization mechanism.
3 Is the thermistor in contact with the Contact the thermistor with the fuser roller.
fuser roller?
4 Is there a scratch on the fuser roller Replace the fuser roller.
surface?
5 Has the fuser roller reached its PM Replace the fuser roller.
life?
6 Is the setting temperature of the Check the adjustment values of fuser roller
fuser roller normal? temperature?
08-410:12 (200°C) 08-411:12 (200°C)
Paper 7 Has the appropriate paper type Select a proper mode.
been selected?
8 Is the setting temperature of the Check the setting and correct it. 08-
fuser roller in each paper type nor- 412,413,437,438
mal?
9 Using the recommended paper? Use the recommended paper.
Developer material 10 Using the specified developer mate- Use the specified developer material and
rial? toner.
Scanner 11 Are the original glass (especially the Clean them.
position of shading correction plate),
mirror and lens dirty?
Feeding direction
Feeding direction
Feeding direction
Feeding direction
Feeding direction
Feeding direction
Feeding direction
Feeding direction
Feeding direction
Feeding direction
Feeding direction
Feeding direction
Feeding direction
Feeding direction
Feeding direction
Feeding direction
Feeding direction
Feeding direction
(1) Ask users to back up the data in the HDD. See the following for the item of data, and the possibil-
ity and the measure of the backup.
(2) Print out the “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE” (content of Function Mode (13) setting)
list.
• Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and then the [USER] button.
• Press the [LIST] button.
• Key in [*] [#] [*] [*] [3] [3] and then press the [START] button. The list is outputted.
(6) Ask users to reset the user’s setting items and to restore the data/information. See the following
for the reset and the restore.
• Printer driver
- Upload them in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess.
• F-code information, Template registering information, Address book
- Restore them in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess
• Department management data
- Import them in the “Administrator” menu of TopAccess.
• Image data in the Electronic Filing
- Upload them in the “e-Filing” of TopAccess.
• When the SSL is enabled, perform the setting of the following items again with "Create self-
certificate" of TopAccess. (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
Country Name
State or Province Name
Locality Name
Organization Name
Organizational Unit Name
Common Name
Email Address
• When wireless LAN is used, perform the setting again on the LCD panel. (only when security
with a certificate is used)
Also, upload the following certificate file with "Install Certificate for Wireless LAN" of TopAc-
cess. (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
CA certificate
User certificate
(7) Referring to the “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE” list which was printed beforehand, per-
form the re-setting.
• Print out the “FUNCTION LIST FOR MAINTENANCE” list after the formatting. (Refer to the
procedure of (2).)
• While pressing [1] and [3] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Function Mode)
• Compare the lists which were printed before and after the formatting to check the setting
items having the different setting values. Set the value which was set before the formatting.
• Turn the power OFF.
(1) Install DIMM (main memory) to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board).
(2) Install NVRAM to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board).
(3) Install NIC board to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board). (e-STUDIO350/450)
(4) Update the version of system ROMs (System Firmware, OS data, UI data) (The ROMs had been
used for the old SYS board).
* See “6. FIRMWARE UPDATING” for the details of System ROM update.
(5) Turn the power OFF and start up with the Setting Mode (08).
(6) When the message “SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE?” is displayed on the LCD, press the
[INITIALIZE] button.
* SRAM is cleared
* If SRAM is not performed, F090 error occurs when starting up.
Notes:
• When SRAM is cleared, following items need to be re-set, so make sure the contents of set-
tings are kept as a record.
<FAX settings>
Terminal ID
Default setting of fax
<E-mail settings>
Setting of properties for E-mail message
<Internet Fax>
Setting of properties for Internet Fax
• When SRAM is cleared, the toner cartridge consumed count of Automatic ordering function of
supplies becomes 0, however, it cannot be re-set.
(9) Check the serial number after performing 08 Code 995. If the number is different from the num-
ber on the label attached on the rear cover of the machine, re-input the correct number with 08
Code 995. (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
(16) Set the dial type. [USER FUNCTIONS] → [ADMIN] → [FAX] → [INITIAL SETUP]
1) Display
The following screen is displayed with setting code 08-670.
HDD manufacturer Model name HDD serial number
3) ID=05 and c5
ID Name Description Remarks
05 Re-allocated Sector Count The number of sectors reassigned This value tends to increase at
HDD failure.
c5 Current Pending Sector Count The number of candidate sectors to This value tends to increase at
be reassigned HDD failure.
01 Read Error Rate This attribute is a measure of the read error rate.
03 Spin Up Time This attribute is a measure of how quickly the drive is able to
spin up from a spun down condition.
04 Spin Start/Stop Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of spin ups
from a spun down condition.
05 Re-allocated Sector Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of reallocated
sectors.
08 Seek Time Performance This attribute is a measure of a drive's seek performance dur-
ing normal online operations.
09 Power-On Hours This attribute is a measure of the total time (hours or minutes
depending on disk manufacturer) the drive has been on.
0a Spin Retry Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of spin retries.
0c Power Cycle Count This attribute is a measure of the number of times the drive
has been turned on.
c0 Power off Retract Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of emergency
unloads.
c1 Load Cycle Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of load/
unloads.
c3 ECC On the Fly Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of the ECC On
the Fly.
c4 Reallocation Event Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of the reallo-
cation events.
c5 Current Pending Sector Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of candidate
sectors to be reallocated.
c6 Off-Line Scan Uncorrectable Sector Count This attribute is a measure of the total number of uncorrect-
able sectors found during the off-line scan.
c7 Ultra DMA CRC Error Count (Rate) This attribute is a measure of the total number of errors found
in data transfer in the Ultra-DMA mode.
c8 Write Error Rate This attribute is a measure of the write error rate.
(3) Check the serial number after performing 08-995 (Equipment number display). If the number is
different from the one on the label attached to the rear cover of the equipment, enter the correct
serial number again with 08-995.
Note:
The MAC address of the equipment is generated based on this serial number. Entering the incor-
rect serial number may result in an inability to access the network due to an invalid MAC
address.
(5) Perform “1: Electrical counter -> Backup counter” of 08-257 (Counter copy) to recover the total
counter.
(9) Set the destination with 08-701 (Destination setting of FAX machine).
(14) Set the dial type. [USER FUNCTIONS] → [ADMIN] → [FAX] → [INITIAL SETUP]
<e-STUDIO352/353/452/453>
• Updating with the download jig
P. 6-34 "6.2 Firmware Updating with Download Jig (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)"
• Updating with the USB Storage Device
P. 6-91 "6.5 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)"
Download jig
Firmware Stored
Individual update Batch update
Master data Hard disk PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 -
(48 MB)
System ROM System control PC board PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1
(SYS board) (16 MB) (16 MB)
Engine ROM Logic PC board K-PWA-DLM-320 or
(LGC board) PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1
(16 MB)
Scanner ROM Scanning section control K-PWA-DLM-320 or
PC board (SLG board) PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1
(16 MB)
NIC ROM NIC board PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1
(16 MB)
RADF ROM RADF control PC board K-PWA-DLM-320 -
(MR-3015)
Finisher ROM Finisher control PC board K-PWA-DLM-320 -
(Finisher firmware) (MJ-1023/MJ-1024)
Finisher ROM (Saddle Finisher control PC board K-PWA-DLM-320 -
stitcher firmware) (MJ-1024)
FAX ROM FAX board (GD-1150) K-PWA-DLM-320 - 6
Refer to the following for the details to update with each download jig.
P. 6-5 "6.1.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB)"
P. 6-11 "6.1.2 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB)"
P. 6-22 "6.1.4 K-PWA-DLM-320"
ROM6 ROM3
• The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) is different from the existing jigs. The ROM is
installed on the board directly. Therefore, ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required
to write the data to these ROMs. Refer to the following to write the data.
P. 6-20 "6.1.3 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)"
ROM
Fig. 6-3
Jig board: K-PWA-DLM-320
Important:
Pay attention to the direction of the ROM.
Connector cover
6
Fig. 6-4
Cover plate
Fig. 6-5
(5) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN100) on the SYS board.
Connector
Fig. 6-6
“Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not com-
pleted properly. Turn OFF the power, and then check the following items. After confirming and
clearing the problems, restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the updating data written to the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(8) Turn OFF the power, and then remove the download jig.
* If an error occurs, the following error message is displayed and the update is interrupted.
Error message
Connector cover
Fig. 6-7
Cover plate
Fig. 6-8
(5) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN100) on the SYS board.
Connector
Fig. 6-9
(6) Turn ON the power while [8] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously.
The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed. “*” is displayed next to the items to
be updated. (All items are selected in the default settings.)
Example: Updating the system ROM (Updating the system ROM is taken as an example and
explained.)
(9) “Update Completed!!” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is com-
pleted properly.
“Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not com-
pleted properly. Turn OFF the power, and then check the following items. After confirming and
clearing the problems, restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the updating data written to the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
If the updating of the NIC firmware is still failed, check the prescription corresponding to the error
message. After confirming and clearing the problem, restart updating from the beginning.
Note:
If the updating of the NIC firmware is not completed properly, wait 5 minutes or more from the
beginning of the updating before turning OFF the power, and then restart updating from the
beginning. If you turn OFF the power within 5 minutes, HDD may be destroyed.
(10) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector
cover.
Turn ON the power while [8] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously.
Error message
Download jig
(PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)
PC
ROM writer
Fig. 6-10
Note:
There are two types of the ROM writer adapter. Use the proper one according to the ROM writer
to be used. Applicable type of the adapter for the ROM writer can be confirmed by the model
name indicated on the board. Confirm that the adapter is available for the ROM writer to be used
before connecting them. If an unapplied adapter is connected, the application of the ROM writer
judges it as an error and writing the data cannot be implemented. Applicable combinations of the
ROM writer and adapter are as follows.
model 1881
model 1931
(LV650)
Fig. 6-11
[PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881] [PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931]
Note:
Be sure not to confuse different ROM Versions since the file name is identical although the ROM
version is different.
Since the procedure differs depending on the data, see the each procedure below.
Important:
• Turn OFF the power before installing or removing the download jig.
• Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not be oper-
ated properly.
Connector cover
Fig. 6-12
(4) Remove the cover plate.
Cover plate
Fig. 6-13
6
(5) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN344) on the logic PC board (LGC board).
Connector
Fig. 6-14
(6) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(8) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector
cover.
Fig. 6-15
Cover plate
Fig. 6-16
Connector
Fig. 6-17
(6) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(7) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blink-
ing in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not
start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the fol-
lowing items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(8) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the right upper
cover.
Fig. 6-18
(4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN14) on the RADF control PC board.
Connector
6
Fig. 6-19
(5) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(6) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blink-
ing in approx. 15 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not
start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the fol-
lowing items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(7) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the RADF rear cover.
Tip:
The following updates are needed according to the finisher model.
• MJ-1023 (Console type):
Only the update of “Finisher firmware” is needed.
• MJ-1024 (Console type with the saddle stitcher):
Two kinds of update “Finisher firmware” and “Saddle stitcher firmware” are needed.
* Connect the finisher interface cable with the equipment after removing the finisher rear cover.
(4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector on the finisher control PC board.
Connector
Fig. 6-22
(5) Change the setting of the DIP switch on the finisher control PC board.
Change the setting of the DIP switch as follows according to the firmware to be updated.
Fig. 6-23
Tip:
The processing status can be confirmed by the lighting of the LED (LED 101-103) on the finisher
control board.
Fig. 6-24
LED
Processing status
LED103 LED102 LED101
0% or above OFF OFF ON
15% or above OFF ON OFF
30% or above OFF ON ON
45% or above ON OFF OFF
60% or above ON OFF ON
75% or above ON ON OFF
90% or above ON ON ON
(7) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks slowly (at interval of
0.8 sec). The LED starts blinking in approx. 30 sec. (finisher section) or 2 min. 30 sec. (saddle
stitcher section) since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start
blinking even though 1 min. has passed (finisher section) or 3 min. (saddle stitcher section), or
LED flashes fast (at interval of 0.1 sec.). In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following
items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
• Is the DIP switch on the finisher control PC board set properly according to the download sec-
tion (finisher or saddle stitcher)?
(8) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and return the DIP switch to the status before
updating.
Connector cover
Fig. 6-25
Cover plate
Fig. 6-26
Connector
Fig. 6-27
(6) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(7) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blink-
ing in approx. 30 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not
start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the fol-
lowing items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(8) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector
cover.
(9) In the FAX Clearing Mode, perform the “FAX Set Up”.
• Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode (08).
08-201: Destination setting of the equipment
08-701: Destination setting of the FAX machine
• Turn ON the power while [1] button and [*] button are pressed simultaneously.
• Key in “100”.
• Press the [START] button.
Notes:
If the equipment does not work properly after the operation (9), follow the procedure below and
then perform the “Clearing the image data” in the FAX Clearing Mode to erase the image data in
the memory.
• Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode (08).
08-201: Destination setting of the equipment
08-701: Destination setting of the FAX machine
• Turn ON the power while [1] button and [*] button are pressed simultaneously.
• Key in “102”.
• Press the [START] button.
After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data
was overwritten properly.
Download jig
Firmware Stored
Batch update Individual update
System ROM System control PC board PWA-DWNLD-350- -
(SYS board) JIG2 (48 MB)
* The system firmware is
stored into the hard disk
from the FROM basic
section software version
“V1.00/4.22”.
Engine ROM Logic PC board K-PWA-DLM-320
(LGC board)
Scanner ROM Scanning section control PC K-PWA-DLM-320
board
(SLG board)
RADF ROM RADF control PC board - K-PWA-DLM-320
(MR-3018)
Finisher ROM Finisher control PC board - K-PWA-DLM-320
(Finisher firmware) (MJ-1023/MJ-1024/MJ-1101)
Finisher ROM Finisher control PC board - K-PWA-DLM-320
(Saddle stitcher firmware) (MJ-1024)
FAX ROM FAX board (GD-1200) - K-PWA-DLM-320
Refer to the following for the details to update with each download jig.
P. 6-36 "6.2.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB)"
P. 6-50 "6.2.2 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)"
Connector Connector
(for SYS board (for ROM writer
connection) adapter connection)
ROM4 ROM1
ROM5 ROM2
ROM6 ROM3
Important:
The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) is the jig in which the Flash ROM is mounted on the
board directly. Therefore, ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to write the data to
these Flash ROMs. Refer to the following to write the data.
P. 6-50 "6.2.2 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)"
K-PWA-DLM-320
6
ROM
Important:
Pay attention to the direction of the ROM.
Cover plate
Fig. 6-30
Connector
Fig. 6-31
(5) Turn ON the power while [8] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously.
The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed. “*” is displayed next to the items to
be updated. (All items are selected in the default settings.)
When the FROM basic section software version to be updated is "V1.00 / 1.12" or earlier:
Fig. 6-32
When the FROM basic section software version to be updated is "V1.00 / 4.22" or later:
Fig. 6-33
Items
<Items vary depending on the FROM basic section software
Types of Firmware version to be updated.>
"V1.00/1.12" or earlier "V1.00/4.22" or later
System ROM 0. OS Update 1. OS UI Update
1. UI Update
2. System Firmware Update
Engine ROM 3. Engine Firmware Update 2. Engine Firmware Update
Scanner ROM 4. Scanner Firmware Update 3. Scanner Firmware Update
Fig. 6-34
When the FROM basic section software version to be updated is "V1.00 / 4.22" or later:
Fig. 6-35
(Updating all the items is taken as an example and explained in the following procedures.)
When the FROM basic section software version to be updated is "V1.00 / 1.12" or earlier:
Fig. 6-36
When the FROM basic section software version to be updated is "V1.00 / 4.22" or later: 6
Fig. 6-37
When the FROM basic section software version to be updated is "V1.00 / 1.12" or earlier:
Fig. 6-38
When the FROM basic section software version to be updated is "V1.00 / 4.22" or later:
Fig. 6-39
When the FROM basic section software version to be updated is "V1.00 / 1.12" or earlier:
Fig. 6-40
When the FROM basic section software version to be updated is "V1.00 / 4.22" or later:
Fig. 6-41
(9) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector
cover.
1. UI Data Update
Update Completed
Fig. 6-42
Update Completed
Fig. 6-43
Turn ON the power while [8] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously
Download jig
(PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)
PC
ROM writer
Fig. 6-44
Note:
There are two types of the ROM writer adapter. Use the proper one according to the ROM writer
to be used. Applicable type of the adapter for the ROM writer can be confirmed by the model
name indicated on the board. Confirm that the adapter is available for the ROM writer to be used
before connecting them. If an unapplied adapter is connected, the application of the ROM writer
judges it as an error and writing the data cannot be implemented. Applicable combinations of the
ROM writer and adapter are as follows.
model 1881
model 1931
(LV650)
[PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881] [PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931]
Note:
Be sure not to confuse different ROM Versions since the file name is identical although the ROM
version is different.
Since the procedure differs depending on the data, see the each procedure below.
Important:
• Turn OFF the power before installing or removing the download jig.
• Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not be oper-
ated properly.
Connector cover
Fig. 6-47
(4) Remove the cover plate.
Cover plate
Fig. 6-48
6
(5) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN344) on the logic PC board (LGC board).
Connector
Fig. 6-49
(6) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(8) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector
cover.
Fig. 6-50
Cover plate
Fig. 6-51
Connector
Fig. 6-52
(6) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(7) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blink-
ing in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not
start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the fol-
lowing items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(8) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the right upper
cover.
Connector
Fig. 6-53
(5) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(6) When the data rewriting is completed, the LED blinks slowly (at an interval of 0.8 sec.).
If the LED blinks fast (at an interval of 0.1 sec.), the rewriting has been failed. In this case, turn
OFF the power and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from 6
the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(7) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the RADF rear cover.
Tip:
The following updates are needed according to the finisher model.
• MJ-1023 (Console type):
Only the update of “Finisher firmware” is needed.
• MJ-1024 (Console type with the saddle stitcher):
Two kinds of update “Finisher firmware” and “Saddle stitcher firmware” are needed.
* Connect the finisher interface cable with the equipment after removing the finisher rear cover.
(4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector on the finisher control PC board.
Connector
Fig. 6-56
(5) Change the setting of the DIP switch on the finisher control PC board.
Change the setting of the DIP switch as follows according to the firmware to be updated.
Fig. 6-57
Tip:
The processing status can be confirmed by the lighting of the LED (LED 101-103) on the finisher
control board.
Fig. 6-58
LED
Processing status
LED103 LED102 LED101
0% or above OFF OFF ON
15% or above OFF ON OFF
30% or above OFF ON ON
45% or above ON OFF OFF
60% or above ON OFF ON
75% or above ON ON OFF
90% or above ON ON ON
(7) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks slowly (at interval of
0.8 sec). The LED starts blinking in approx. 30 sec. (finisher section) or 2 min. 30 sec. (saddle
stitcher section) since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start
blinking even though 1 min. has passed (finisher section) or 3 min. (saddle stitcher section), or
LED flashes fast (at interval of 0.1 sec.). In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following
items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
• Is the DIP switch on the finisher control PC board set properly according to the download sec-
tion (finisher or saddle stitcher)?
(8) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and return the DIP switch to the status before
updating.
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the board access cover.
Fig. 6-59
(4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN9) on the Finisher control board.
Download jig
Fig. 6-60
(5) Turn ON the power while pressing [0] and [8] simultaneously.
Updating starts and the LED on the download jig lights
The LED on the download jig starts blinking in approx. 12 seconds after the update started.
It is assumed that the update is failed if the LED does not start blinking even after 20 seconds
have elapsed.
In this case, turn the power OFF and check the following items.
Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the downloading jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM attached to the downloading jig properly?
• Has the update data been written correctly to the ROM on the jig?
• Is the download jig or the equipment damaged?
(7) Turn the power OFF and remove the download jig.
Connector cover
Fig. 6-61
Cover plate
Fig. 6-62
Connector
Fig. 6-63
(6) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
(7) After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blink-
ing in approx. 30 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not
start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the fol-
lowing items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning.
• Is the download jig connected properly?
• Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly?
• Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly?
• Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(8) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector
cover.
(9) In the FAX Clearing Mode, perform the “FAX Set Up”.
• Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode (08).
08-201: Destination setting of the equipment
08-701: Destination setting of the FAX machine
• Turn ON the power while [1] button and [*] button are pressed simultaneously.
• Key in “100”.
• Press the [START] button.
Notes:
If the equipment does not work properly after the operation (9), follow the procedure below and
then perform the “Clearing the image data” in the FAX Clearing Mode to erase the image data in
the memory.
• Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode (08).
08-201: Destination setting of the equipment
08-701: Destination setting of the FAX machine
• Turn ON the power while [1] button and [*] button are pressed simultaneously.
• Key in “102”.
• Press the [START] button.
After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data
was overwritten properly.
OS:
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows NT4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP Connecting cable:
USB cable or
RS-232C cable
PC:
IBM PC/AT or compatible machine
(USB port or RS-232C port is needed)
Fig. 6-64
Important:
• Updating with USB connection is more recommended since the data transfer speed is lower
and it takes more time to update in the serial connection with RS-232C cable.
Example: Updating time for system ROM (sysfirm.tz: Approx. 8 MB)
RS-232C connection: Approx. 1 hour and 20 minutes
USB connection: Approx. 10 minutes
* The updating time noted above is a reference. It may vary depending on the performance
of the PC used.
• Updating through USB is not feasible for Windows NT4.0 since this operating system does
not support USB. When this system is used, update in the serial connection with RS-232C
cable.
• When updating through USB (using FSMS), a printer driver needs to be installed in the PC in
advance. Refer to the Printing Guide about the installation method of the printer driver.
• Do not turn OFF the power of equipment or PC during the update. The data could be dam-
aged and not to be continued to function properly.
• When using FSMS, set “1” at FSMS permission code (08-258) in the Setting Mode (08) in
advance.
• The data file (tz file format) of each firmware is recommended to save at the local drive in the
PC (C drive, etc.) where FSMS program is installed.
(5) Enter the login password and click the [OK] button.
* Set the login password at the installation of FSMS.
(7) Select the model name of the equipment to be updated from the drop-down menu and click the
[OK] button.
Tip:
The content of ”Status” display can be renewed to the latest status by clicking the [Refresh]
6
button. When the status is displayed as “Disconnected” because the start up of the equipment is
delayed, the status can be renewed to “Connected” by clicking this.
Tip:
The relation between the types of firmware to be updated and items to check is as follows in the
table below.
Tip:
When selecting the multiple files in a batch, the name of the unselected data file (not saved in the
folder) may be displayed. In this case, click the [OK] button and then the update of all files except
the displayed file starts.
Tip:
During transmission, the message “WAIT” or “NOW SERVICING” is displayed on the LCD
screen of the equipment. In this case, all the button operations are locked.
(14) The equipment restarts automatically and the items to be updated and processing status are dis-
played on the LCD screen.
(15) “Update Completed!!” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is com-
pleted properly.
* When the updating of the NIC firmware is failed, an error message is displayed as the figure
below. Turn OFF the power and then check the above-mentioned items. After confirming
them, select only”NIC ROM” (6. NIC Firmware Update) and restart updating from the begin-
ning. This may complete the updating properly.
Note:
If the updating of the NIC firmware is not completed properly, wait 5 minutes or more from the
beginning of the updating before turning OFF the power, and then restart updating from the
beginning. If you turn OFF the power within 5 minutes, HDD may be destroyed.
Important:
• The following USB storage devices are recommended for updating.
- MELCO ClipDrive (RUF-C128M)
- Lexar Media JumpDrive (RD128-231)
- Iomega Mini USB Drive (Mini 128MB USB Drive) 6
• Only the USB storage device which meets the following conditions should be used for updat-
ing. Be careful since updating with any device other than the above is never guaranteed.
- A combination USB storage device with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the
USB port) and its capacity is 64 MB or more
- A USB storage device which is complied with the following standards regulated by USB-IF
(USB Implementers Forum)
Class number: 8 (=08h) (Mass-storage class)
Sub-class number: 6 (=06h) (SCSI transfer command set)
Protocol number: 80 (=50h) (Bulk-Only)
* Most common USB storage devices are complied with the specification above and can
be used for updating. However, the operation in this equipment is not always
guaranteed since the most of these devices are developed based on the use in PC
environ ment (Windows or Macintosh). Therefore, confirm thoroughly that the device is
opera tional in this equipment when purchasing the device.
• The USB storage device complied with USB1.1 and USB2.0 can be used for updating. How-
ever, the update is performed in the speed of USB1.1 when the device complied with USB2.0
is used.
• Do not update the firmware by any storage device other than a flash memory (such as a USB
connection type memory card reader, CD/DVD drive or hard disk) since it is never guaran-
teed.
(1) Connect the USB storage device to the PC and write the data file.
• Confirm the data file name before writing
( P. 6-79 "6.4 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device (e-STUDIO350/450)").
• The file system of USB storage device should be formatted in FAT format.
• Windows 95 and NT do not support USB. Be careful since the data can not be written on the
devices in the PCs with these operating systems.
Cover plate
Fig. 6-67
(4) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
USB connector
(host)
Fig. 6-68
Notes:
• Do not connect multiple USB storage devices together.
• The USB storage device can be connected to either of 2 USB connectors (host).
• In case the printer kit (GM-1010), printer/scanner kit (GM-2010) and scanner upgrade kit
(GM- 3010) are used, the update must be performed after all the "dongles" are disconnected
from the USB connector (host) and only the USB storage device is connected.
Note:
The display of items on this screen varies depending on the types of data written on the USB
storage device. Each item is displayed only when each data file is written on the USB storage
device in the following conditions.
Item Condition
0. OS Update ROM.bin is written.
1. HDD Update All master data files (1, 2, 3 ... n) are written.
2. UI Data Update ROM.bin is written.
3. System Firmware Update sysfirm.bin and ROM.bin are written.
4. NIC Firmware Update ROM.bin is written. 6
5. Scanner Firmware Update ROM.bin is written.
6. Machine Firmware Update ROM.bin is written.
If the USB storage device is not recognized properly, the following message is displayed. In this
case, turn OFF the power of the equipment and connect the device properly. Then repeat the
procedure from (5)
Example: Updating the master data and system ROM (Updating the master data and system
ROM is taken as an example and explained.)
Tip:
Updating can be continued with another USB storage device on which the firmware data is writ-
ten in the following procedure when the updating is completed.
a. Confirm the message “Please Connect Next Storage Key. Push ‘START’ Button!!” is displayed
at the bottom of the LCD screen.
b. Replace the USB storage device while the power is left ON.
c. Press the [START] button.
d. The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed. Continue the updating from
procedure (6). However, the items already updated are not displayed on the screen.
“Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not com-
pleted properly. Turn OFF the power, and then check the following items. After confirming and
clearing the problems, restart updating from the beginning. 6
• Does the USB storage device meet the conditions to be used for updating (P. 6-79)?
• Is the data file written properly on the USB storage device?
• Is the USB storage device installed properly?
• Do the USB storage device and equipment operate properly?
* When the updating of the NIC firmware is failed, an error message is displayed as the figure
below. Turn OFF the power and then check the above-mentioned items. After confirming
them, select only “4. NIC Firmware Update” and restart updating from the beginning. This
may complete the updating properly.
If the updating of the NIC firmware is still failed, check the prescription corresponding to the error
message. After confirming and clearing the problem, restart updating from the beginning.
Note:
If the updating of the NIC firmware is not completed properly, wait 5 minutes or more from the
beginning of the updating before turning OFF the power, and then restart updating from the
beginning. If you turn OFF the power within 5 minutes, HDD may be destroyed.
(9) Turn OFF the power, remove the USB storage device and install the connector cover.
(10) Perform the initialization of the updating data (NVRAM updating).
a. Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
b. Key in “947”, and then press the [START] button.
c. Press the [INITIALIZE] button.
Turn ON the power while [4] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously.
6
File name of master data Total files
Copied
* If the USB storage device is not recognized properly, the following message is displayed and the
update is interrupted.
Error message
• The data file for updating is stored in the model specific folder.
Never change the model specific folder name since it is used for discriminating the data file
when the updating data files for multiple models are stored in the USB storage device.
• Store the model specific folder in the root directory of the USB storage device.
• Storing the data file directly in the root directory is possible when the updating data files for
one specific model is stored in the USB storage device.
However, if the model specific folder for the same model as that of the data file stored in the
root directory already exists, the model specific folder will have the priority.
• The USB storage device complied with USB1.1 and USB2.0 can be used for updating. How-
ever, the update is performed in the speed of USB1.1 when the device complied with USB2.0
is used.
• Do not update the firmware by any storage device other than a flash memory (such as a USB
connection type memory card reader, CD/DVD drive or hard disk) since it is never guaran-
teed.
mentusb.o
352_452
dlFirmWare_352_452
firmImage0.bin
firmImage1.bin
firmImage2.bin
1
2
3
:
Fig. 6-69
Important:
• The "mentusb.o" file stored in the root of the USB storage device is a common file in e-
STUDIO850 Series, e-STUDIO451c Series and e-STUDIO282 Series. To save the firmware
of more than one model into one USB storage device, one "mentusb.o" file stored in the root 6
of USB storage device is sufficient.
• Be careful not to mix up the "mentusb.o" file because there is a file whose name is the same
in the localization tool.
(1) Connect the USB storage device to the PC and write the model specific folder in which the data
file is stored.
• Confirm the model specific folder name and data file name before writing the data
( P. 6-91 "6.5 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)").
• The file system of USB storage device should be formatted in FAT format.
• Windows 95 and NT do not support USB. Be careful since the data can not be written on the
devices in the PCs with these operating systems.
Cover plate
Fig. 6-70
USB connector
(host)
Fig. 6-71
Notes:
• Do not connect multiple USB storage devices together.
• The USB storage device can be connected to either of 2 USB connectors (host).
• In case the printer kit (GM-1060), printer/scanner kit (GM-2060) and scanner upgrade kit
(GM- 4060) are used, the update must be performed after all the "dongles" are disconnected
from the USB connector (host) and only the USB storage device is connected.
Fig. 6-72
After the update program is finished being loaded, the following screen appears.
Fig. 6-73
Note:
If the "dlFirmWare_352_452" file of the update program is not stored in the USB storage device
though "mentusb.o" file exists, or the loading of the update program fails, the following screen
appears. In this case, check if the update program is correctly stored and repeat step (5) and
after.
Fig. 6-74
When the FROM basic section software version of the equipment is "V1.00 / 1.12" or earlier:
Fig. 6-75
Note:
The display of items on this screen varies depending on the types of data written on the USB
storage device. Each item is displayed only when each data file is written on the USB storage
device in the following conditions.
Item Condition
0. OS Update firmImage0.bin is written. 6
1. HDD Update All master data files (1, 2, 3 ... n) are written.
2. UI Data Update firmImage0.bin is written.
3. System Firmware Update firmImage0.bin and firmImage1.bin are written.
4. Engine Firmware Update firmImage2.bin is written.
5. Scanner Firmware Update firmImage2.bin is written.
When the FROM basic section software version of the equipment is "V1.00 / 4.22" or later:
Fig. 6-76
Item Condition
1. OS UI Update firmImage0.bin, firmImage1.bin are written.
2. HDD SYS Update All master data files (1, 2, 3 ... n) are written.
3. Engine Firmware Update firmImage2.bin is written.
4. Scanner Firmware Update firmImage2.bin is written.
If the USB storage device is not recognized properly, the following message is displayed. In this
case, disconnect the USB storage device and connect it again within 3 minutes, or turn OFF the
power of the equipment and connect the device properly. Then repeat the procedure from (5).
Fig. 6-77
Fig. 6-78
If an attempt to update the FROM basic section software "V1.00 / 1.12" or earlier version to the
latest firmware version without the update program, the following screen appears. In this case,
store "mentusb.o" and "dlFirmWare_352_452", which are the files for update program, in the
specified folder and repeat step (5) and after.
Fig. 6-79
Items
<Items vary depending on the FROM basic section software
Types of Firmware version of the equipment>
"V1.00/1.12" or earlier "V1.00/4.22" or later
System ROM 0. OS Update 1. OS UI Update
(OS data)
System ROM 2. UI Data Update
(UI data)
Master data 1. HDD Update 2. HDD SYS Update
System ROM 3. System Firmware Update
(System firmware)
Engine ROM 4. Engine Firmware Update 3. Engine Firmware Update
Scanner ROM 5. Scanner Firmware Update 4. Scanner Firmware Update
Fig. 6-80
When the FROM basic section software version of the equipment is "V1.00 / 4.22" or later:
Fig. 6-81
When the FROM basic section software version of the equipment is "V1.00 / 1.12" or earlier:
Fig. 6-82
When the FROM basic section software version of the equipment is "V1.00 / 4.22" or later:
Fig. 6-83
When the FROM basic section software version of the equipment is "V1.00 / 1.12" or earlier:
Fig. 6-84
When the FROM basic section software version of the equipment is "V1.00 / 4.22" or later:
Fig. 6-85
When the FROM basic section software version of the equipment is "V1.00 / 1.12" or earlier:
Fig. 6-86
When the FROM basic section software version of the equipment is "V1.00 / 4.22" or later:
6
Fig. 6-87
(10) Turn OFF the power, remove the USB storage device and install the cover plate.
2. UI Data Update
3. System
Firmware Update
Update Completed
Fig. 6-88
Turn ON the power while [4] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously
* “Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed
properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display.
Update Completed
Fig. 6-89
Below is an example of the changes of the LCD screen during update.
Turn ON the power while [4] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously
* “Update Failed.” is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed
properly. “Failed” appears next to the failed item on the status display.
6.6.1 e-STUDIO350/450
(3) HDD partition creation (“All Partition Delete and Create Loader Partition.”)
When the HDD is replaced or UI data, etc. are downloaded using the USB storage, it is neces-
sary to format a partition in the HDD before downloading. In this case, the partition is created in
the HDD with this function.
Notes:
1. When downloading with a download jig, it is not necessary to format a partition in advance.
2. Perform the HDD partition formatting only when a new HDD and scrambler board are installed
since all data in the current HDD are erased by this operation.
6
(1) Turn ON the power while [3] button and [CLEAR] button are pressed simultaneously.
• The following screen is displayed.
(2) Select the item with the digital keys and press the [START] button.
(3) HDD partition creation (“All Partition Delete and Create Loader Partition.”)
When the HDD is replaced or UI data, etc. are downloaded using the USB storage, it is neces-
sary to format a partition in the HDD before downloading. In this case, the partition is created in
the HDD with this function.
Notes:
1. When downloading with a download jig, it is not necessary to format a partition in advance.
2. Perform the HDD partition formatting only when a new HDD and scrambler board are installed
since all data in the current HDD are erased by this operation.
(1) Turn ON the power while [3] button and [CLEAR] button are pressed simultaneously.
• The following screen is displayed.
(2) Select the item with the digital keys and press the [START] button.
1) +3.3V
+3.3VA: CN412 Pins 13, 14, 15 and 16
Output to the SYS board
+3.3VB: CN412 Pins 19 and 20
Output to the SYS board
+3.3VB: CN413 Pin 1
Output to the LGC board
+3.3VB: CN415 Pins 17 and 18
Output to the SLG board
2) +5.1V
+5.1VA: CN412 Pins 24 and 26
Output to the SYS board
+5.1VB: CN412 Pin 25
Output to the SYS board
+5.1VB: CN413 Pins 3 and 4
Output to the LGC board, PFP/LCF (via LGC board),
Bridge unit / Job separator / Offset tray (via LGC board)
+5.1VB: CN413 Pin 11
Output to the FIL board or FUS board
+5.1VB: CN415 Pins 5 and 6
Output to the RADF
+5.1VB: CN415 Pins 21 and 22
Output to the SLG board
+5.1VB: CN416 Pin 1
Output to the finisher
3) +12V
+12VA: CN412 Pin 7 7
Output to the SYS board
+12VB: CN412 Pin 5
Output to the SYS board
+12VB: CN413 Pin 7
Output to the LGC board
+12VB: CN415 Pin 15
Output to the SLG board
1) +5.1V
+5.1VD: CN414 Pin 9
Output to the LGC board
2) +24V
+24VD1: CN414 Pins 1 and 2
Output to the LGC board, PFP/LCF (via LGC board)
+24VD1: CN418 Pin 1
Output to the power supply cooling fan
+24VD2: CN414 Pins 5 and 6
Output to the LGC board, Bridge unit / Job separator / Offset tray (via LGC
board)
+24VD3: CN415 Pins 1 and 2
Output to the RADF
+24VD4: CN415 Pins 9 and 10
Output to the SLG board
+24VD5: CN416 Pin 3
Output to the finisher
<Output connector>
IH
e-STUDIO350/352/353/450/452/453
F4
Main switch Door switch F1 +24VD2 CN414 LGC board, Bridge unit / Job separator /
AC IN
Live Offset tray (via LGC board)
CN411
Neutral
F6
AC DOOR +24VD4 CN415 SLG board
F7
+24VD5 CN416 Finisher
Switching
power supply +3.3VA CN412 SYS board
FUS board +3.3VB CN412 SYS board
+3.3VB CN413 LGC board
7-4
05/11
+3.3VB CN415 SLG board
*ASD/AUD/CND models: Standard
*MJD model: Option +5.1VA CN412 SYS board
+5.1VB CN412 SYS board
+5.1VB CN413 LGC board, FIL board / FUS board,
Configuration of Power Supply Unit
CN411
+5.1VB CN416 Finisher
AC MAIN +12VA CN412 SYS board
-12VA CN412 SYS board
8.1.1 Outline
Automatically orders the toner and used toner container.
The number of the CONDITION can be set respectively for the toner and used toner container.
(3) If Order Failure Occurs
If some problems occur and the order cannot be placed after registering an order as a job, refer
to the standard countermeasure for the FAX/E-mail transmission failure.
Entering the password and customer information is required because the setting is made from
the ADMIN screen. Setting it with the administrator is a must.
• Basic setting
[ADMIN] > [SERVICE] > [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] > [ORDER INFORMATION]
AUTO SUPPLY ORDER Ordered by: [FAX], [MAIL], [HTTP] (*1)
FAX NUMBER FAX number of supplier (*2)
E-MAIL E-mail address of supplier (*3)
CUSTOMER Customer information
NAME
TEL NUMBER
E-MAIL
ADDRESS
SUPPLIER Supplier information
NAME
ADDRESS
SERVICE TECNICIAN Service technician information
NUMBER
NAME
TEL NUMBER
E-MAIL
*1 HTTP has not been supported yet.
*2 Even when "FAX" is selected, the order is not placed without entering the FAX number.
*3 Even when "MAIL" is selected, the order is not placed without entering the E-mail address.
(1) Start up the self-diagnosis setting mode 08-765, and then change the setting value to "0".
(2) Turn the power OFF, and then ON.
(3) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button to enter the user function screen.
(4) Press the [ADMIN] button.
• When the Administrator Password has been set, ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD screen is
displayed.
(5) Press the [PASSWORD] button and the screen is switched to a full keyboard. Then key in the
Administrator Password and press the [ENTER] button.
* Confirm the password to the administrator.
(14) Press the buttons of the screen of CUSTOMER/SUPPLIER to set the required item.
CUSTOMER
[NAME] Input the name of customer.
[TEL NUMBER] Input the telephone number of customer.
[E-MAIL] Input the E-mail address of customer.
[ADDRESS] Input the address of customer.
SUPPLIER
[NAME] Input the name of supplier.
[ADDRESS] Input the address of supplier.
(17) Press a button on the screen of SERVICE TECHNICIAN/ RESULT PRINTING to set the required
item.
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
[NUMBER] Input the number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[NAME] Input the name of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[TEL NUMBER] Input the telephone number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[E-MAIL] Input the E-mail address of SERVICE TECHNICIAN.
[DESCRIPTION] Input the remarks if you want to register.
RESULT PRINTING
[OFF] / [ALWAYS] / [ON ERROR]
Whichever you press, the result list is printed.
(18) Press the [ENTER] button to register and complete the order information setting.
AUTO ORDER
[ON]/[OFF] Allows you to select whether each part to be ordered is placed automati-
cally or not.
(25) Press the [ENTER] button to register the setting of toner order.
(27) Press the [USED TONER CONTAINER] button, and then input the order information of USED
TONER CONTAINER in the same way of TONER.
(1) FAX (This format is the same as that of TIFF image attached E-mail.)
*1 Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines)
TOTAL
PRINT COUNTER 999999999
SCAN COUNTER 999999999
(2) E-MAIL (TIFF image attached with the E-mail is the same format with that of the FAX order
sheet.)
SUBJECT: SUPPLY ORDER REQUEST
*1 Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines)
ORDER XXXXXXXXX
DATE & TIME :99-99-'99 99:99
CUSTOMER NUMBER :XXX
CUSTOMER NAME :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
CUSTOMER ADDRESS :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
CUSTOMER E-MAIL ADDRESS :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SERVICE TECHNICIAN
TEL NUMBER :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SERVICE TECHNICIAN E-MAIL :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SUPPLIER NAME :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
SUPPLIER ADDRESS :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TOTAL
PRINT COUNTER 999999999
SCAN COUNTER 999999999
8.2.1 Outline
This function automatically notifies the status of the equipment to the service technician by E-mail or
FAX. The following three are the items to be notified.
[ 1 ] Preparation
The screen to set this function is not displayed at the default setting.
Set this screen to be displayed with the following code (08).
[ 2 ] Setting procedure
(1) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and select the [ADMIN] button. Then enter the password
and press the [ENTER] button.
• Confirm the password to the administrator.
• Press the [FAX NUMBER] button, key in the FAX number and then press the [ENTER] button.
• Key in the date (acceptable values: 1-31) in "Date" and press the [SET] button. (Correct the
value by pressing the [CLEAR] button if the [SET] button is not yet pressed. Correct the value
by pressing the [RESET] button to move the cursor back to the digit to be corrected if the
[SET] button is already pressed.)
• Press the [ENTER] button to set all. The display returns to the screen at procedure 5).
Note:
Service Notification setting is also available from the following setting mode (08).
PMCounterFormat:
7 LargeSizePMCount 1
8 LargeSizePMPaperDefinition 1
Charge Counter:
Large Small
<Print Counter>
9 Copy 00000000 00000000
10 Print 00000000 00000000
11 List 00000000 00000000
12 FAX 00000000 00000000
<Scan Counter>
13 Copy Scan 00000000 00000000
14 FAX Scan 00000000 00000000
15 Net Scan 00000000 00000000
<FAX Counter>
16 Transmit 00000000 00000000
17 Receive 00000000 00000000
18 Set PM 00000000
19 Current PM 00000000
20 Set PMTime 00000000
21 Current PMTime 00000000
3 Serial number
22 History of error
*1 The latest 20 errors are displayed.
CHARGE COUNTER
3 Serial number
22 History of error
*2 The latest 20 errors are displayed.
3 Serial number
6 Error code
8 History of error
*1 The latest 20 errors are displayed.
[ 1 ] Preparation
The screen to set this function is not displayed at the default setting.
Set this screen to be displayed with the following code (08).
(1) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and select the [ADMIN] button. Then enter the password
and press the [ENTER] button.
• Confirm the password to the administrator.
Fig. 8-1
(2) Press the [SERVICE] button.
Fig. 8-2
(3) Press the [SERVICE NOTIFICATION] button.
Fig. 8-3
Fig. 8-4
(5) Enter the E-mail address or FAX number of the destination.
• When pressing the [E-MAIL] button, the screen is switched to a full keyboard. Then enter the
E-mail addresses and press the [ENTER] button. (Maximum 3 addresses can be set.)
Fig. 8-5
• Press the [FAX NUMBER] button, key in the FAX number and then press the [ENTER] button.
Fig. 8-6
Fig. 8-7
Set the date and time of the Total Counter.
The following 3 items can be specified for the date setting, and more than one day of the week
also can be selected.
• Day of the week (More than one day can be selected.)
• Notify Date 1
• Notify Date 2
You can send the Total Counter immediately without the above settings by pressing the [SEND
NOW] button.
Fig. 8-8
Key in the date (acceptable values: 0-31) in "Notify Date 1" or "Notify Date 2" and press the [SET]
button.
([SET] button not pressed: Correct the value after pressing the [CLEAR] button.
[SET] button already pressed: Correct the value after pressing the [RESET] button to move the
cursor back to the digit to be rectified.)
Fig. 8-9
Key in the time (acceptable values: 00:00-23:59) in "Time".
Key in the time in the hour column of "Time", press the [SET] button, key in the time in the minute
column of "Time" and press the [SET] button.
([SET] button not pressed: Correct the value after pressing the [CLEAR] button.
[SET] button already pressed: Correct the value after pressing the [RESET] button to move the
cursor back to the digit to be rectified.)
After all the settings are completed, press the [ENTER] button. The display returns to the screen
in step (5).
Note:
Service Notification setting is also available from the following setting mode (08).
Fig. 8-10
3 Serial number
5 Supplier information
6 Customer information
25 History of error
*1 The latest 20 errors are displayed.
Sheet 2
COUNTER NOTIFICATION (*1)
CHARGE COUNTER 10 11
Fig. 8-11
3 Serial number
5 Customer information
7 Supplier information
25 History of error
*2 The latest 20 errors are displayed.
8 Supplier:
Name : SUPPLIER_NAME
Tel Number : 1122334455
E-Mail : supplier_emailaddress@cccc.xxx
Address : SUPPLIER_ADDRESS
9 Customer:
Name : CUSTOMER_NAME
Tel Number : 1234567890
E-Mail : customer_emailaddress@dddd.xxx
Address : CUSTOMER_ADDRESS
10 Service Technician:
Number : svc12
Name : SERVICE_TECHNICIAN_NAME
Tel Number : 0987654321
E-Mail : svc@toshibatec.co.jp
8
Fig. 8-12
3 Serial number
6 Error code
8 Supplier information
9 Customer information
11 History of error
*1 The latest 20 errors are displayed.
Important:
• It is assumed that data cloning is to be performed when equipment is installed or options are
installed. If the address book has been registered, do not perform data cloning. Registered /
set data are lost.
• The USB storage device for the data cloning must meet the following conditions. A data clon-
ing operation with any devices other than the following will not be guaranteed.
- A combination USB storage device with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the
USB port) and its capacity is between 128 MB and 512 MB (or 1 GB).
- A device compliant with the following specifications established by USB-IF (USB Imple-
menters Forum)
Class number: 8 (=08h) (Mass storage class)
Sub-Class number: 6 (=06h) (SCSI transfer command set)
Protocol number: 80 (=50h) (Bulk-only)
* Most of the common USB storage devices are compliant with the above specifications and
are therefore applicable to this data cloning. However, most of these devices were origi-
nally developed to be used in an environment for PCs (e.g. Windows or Macintosh) and
thus operations exclusively with this equipment have not been fully guaranteed. Therefore,
the user must thoroughly check in advance whether there will be any problem in operating
with this equipment when adopting one of these devices.
• The USB storage devices compliant with both USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 can be used for this data
cloning. However, the operating speed when using a device compliant with USB 2.0 is equiv-
alent to the one with a device compliant with USB 1.1.
• Data cloning with any storage devices other than a flash memory (e.g. USB-connectable
memory card reader, CD/DVD drive, hard disk) will never be guaranteed. Therefore never use
them for this operation.
• Be sure to unplug the LAN cable and Fax line before data are backed up / restored. Also, do
not use the RADF and open the cover, drawer, etc. during the data cloning.
• Data can be backed up / restored only for the same model and version. If the version is differ-
ent, update the firmware and back up / restore data in the same version.
• Restore data to equipment which has the same options as when the data are backed up. 9
• If "Department management" or "User management information" is restored, the counter val-
ues are copied as well, so clear all of them. However, the total counter is not copied.
• Before starting data cloning, check that “Acceptance of data cloning using USB storage
device (08-9889)” is set at "0" (Accepted). If this is set at "1" (Not accepted), data cloning is
disabled. In this case, ask the administrator to enable it on the TopAccess menu.
• Delete the backed up data in the USB storage device after the data cloning.
(1) Connect the USB storage device to the PC and delete all data in the USB storage device.
• The file system for the USB storage device should be in the FAT format.
• Windows95 and NT do not support USB. The data cannot be written into the device with the
PC in which these OS are installed.
(4) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
USB connector
(host)
Fig. 9-1
Notes:
• Do not connect multiple USB storage devices together.
• The USB storage device can be connected to either of 2 USB connectors (host).
• In case the printer kit (GM-1060), printer/scanner kit (GM-2060) and scanner kit (GM-4060)
are used, the data must be backed up after all the "dongles" are disconnected from the USB
connector (host) and only the USB storage device is connected.
(5) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-2
Note:
When “Disable” is set for the [Data Cloning Function] in TopAccess, the following screen is dis-
played. Contact and ask the administrator to change the setting on TopAccess.
Fig. 9-3
Fig. 9-4
E.g.:
In case of backing up the department management and user management information
Fig. 9-5
Fig. 9-6
(10) "Back Up Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly com-
pleted.
Fig. 9-7
(11) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
(12) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
(13) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-8
Notes:
• After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
• When “Disable” is set for the [Data Cloning Function] in TopAccess, the following screen is
displayed. Contact and ask the administrator to change the setting on TopAccess.
Fig. 9-9
Fig. 9-10
Fig. 9-11
(17) "Back Up Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the backup has been properly com-
pleted.
Fig. 9-12
(18) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
(19) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
(20) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-13
Notes:
• After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
• When “Disable” is set for the [Data Cloning Function] in TopAccess, the following screen is
displayed. Contact and ask the administrator to change the setting on TopAccess.
Fig. 9-14
Fig. 9-15
(The following screens are given as an example of when SRAM data are backed up.)
Fig. 9-16
Fig. 9-17
(25) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
(2) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
USB connector
(host)
Fig. 9-18
Notes:
• Do not connect multiple USB storage devices together.
• The USB storage device can be connected to either of 2 USB connectors (host).
• In case the printer kit (GM-1060), printer/scanner kit (GM-2060) and scanner kit (GM-4060)
are used, the data must be restored after all the "dongles" are disconnected from the USB
connector (host) and only the USB storage device is connected.
(3) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-19
Note:
When “Disable” is set for the [Data Cloning Function] in TopAccess, the following screen is dis-
played. Contact and ask the administrator to change the setting on TopAccess.
Fig. 9-20
Fig. 9-21
E.g.:
In case of restoring the department management and user management information
Fig. 9-22
Fig. 9-23
(8) "Restore Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the restore has been properly com-
pleted.
Fig. 9-24
(9) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
(10) Clear the counter (in case of restoring "Department Code" and "User Info").
Since the counter values are also copied, clear all of them. However, the total counter is not cop-
ied.
<Procedure>
Press the buttons as follows: [USER FUNCTION] → [ADMIN] → Enter the password → 9
[COUNTER] → [DEPARTMENT SETTING] → Enter the password → [RESET ALL COUNTERS]
* Enable the department management when the [RESET ALL COUNTERS] button is set to be
disabled.
(11) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
(12) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-25
Notes:
• After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
• When “Disable” is set for the [Data Cloning Function] in TopAccess, the following screen is
displayed. Contact and ask the administrator to change the setting on TopAccess.
Fig. 9-26
Fig. 9-27
Fig. 9-28
(16) "Restore Completed" is displayed on the LCD screen when the restore has been properly com-
pleted.
Fig. 9-29
(17) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
(18) Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
(19) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
The screen to select the backup/restore items is displayed.
Fig. 9-30
Notes:
• After the item is selected with the digital keys, displaying the next menu may take a long time.
• When “Disable” is set for the [Data Cloning Function] in TopAccess, the following screen is
displayed. Contact and ask the administrator to change the setting on TopAccess.
Fig. 9-31
Fig. 9-32
(The following screens are given as an example of when SRAM data are restored.)
Fig. 9-33
Fig. 9-34
(24) Turn the power OFF and remove the USB storage device.
Fig. 9-35
* In addition to the backed up data, the following files are created in each folder.
Back up item File name
User data user_data.txt
Setting item data setting_data.txt
SRAM data sram_data.txt
<Contents of file>
Version: VTD08.100 J
Serial Number: 0123456789
Date: MON SEP 26 18:34:40 2005
(OPTION)
J655 J656
N AC(N:MAIN) AC(N)
A 1 3
INLET GND NF
B
(AC IN) L AC(L:MAIN) AC(L)
C 2 4
NS-FIL
(NOISE FILTER)
LOAD
MAIN
GND
G F
1 1 2 1 1
AC-DC DC
NF
OPTION AC(L:DOOR) F1 SG
3 4 6 12
05/11
10 - 1
AC(L:SCN DH)
6 6 A
Fig. 10-1
CN451
PS-IH
J607 CN454 J463
CN528 B
+5.1VB +5.1VB +5.1VB CN450
1 1 3
2 2 2
SG SG SG
3 3 1
ASD,AUD,SAD,
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
J582
J644 J635 TWD,CND MODELS:
AC(N:DRM DH) THERMO-DRM-DH
2 2
STANDARD
AC(L:DRM DH) DRM-DH
1 1 NAD,MJD MODELS:
OPTION
SCANNER
THERMO-SCN-DH J64
AC(L)
AC(N)
+5.1VB
SG
AC(L)
AC(N)
AC(L)
AC(N)
+5.1VB
SG
1 1
4
3
1
2
1
2
3
4
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
CN431
CN493
CN494
CN495
J61 J62 SCN-R-DH
2 2
1 1 1 1
AC(L:SCN DH) DH-SCN-L SCN-L-DH
RY RY 2 2 2 2
J641 J60 J63
CN433 CN433
3 3
2 2
1 1
CN432 CN432
1 1
2 2
PWA-F-FUS 3 PWA-F-FIL 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
PWA-F-NIC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
10
11
12
13
14
J3
J2
A A
SH
SH
SH
SH
FA45
FA45
FA78
FA78
(TD-)FA2
(RD-)FA6
NC(MTG)
NC(MTG)
(TD+)FA1
(RD+)FA3
(OPTION) J151
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
NC(/CS2P)
D15
D14
D13
SG
D12
D11
D10
SG
D09
D08
/INTPR1
SG
A03
A02
A01
NC(SRXD)
A00
D07
D06
A15
D05
A14
D04
A13
D03
A12
D02
A11
D01
A10
D00
A09
A04
A08
/RESET
A07
/ACK
A06
/CSP1
A05
NC(OEP)
NC(STXD)
RW
SG
A16
SG
+3.3VA
SG
NC(DACK)
+3.3VA
/INTPR2
SG
BRDIN
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
J152
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN121
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
TRST#
A1 LAN(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
+12VA Board to Board
A2 PWA-F-SYS
TMS
A3
TD1 CN150 CN124 CN100
A4
+5.1VA +3.3VA CN116 SG
A5 1 1 50
INTA# +3.3VA CN113 CN171 SG SG
A6 2 2 1 49
INTC# +3.3VA +12VA DQ0 FAX(OPTION) /WRX CN316 J520 CN455
A7 3 3 1 1 2 48
+5.1VA SG SG DQ1 CN602 RMSL CN312 IH2ON-0A IH2ON
A8 4 4 2 2 3 47 A1 13 1 1 (OPTION)
RESERVED -12VA SG DQ2 CN401 CN600 D[0] +3.3VA D[0] +5VSW +5VSW CN314 CN315
A9 5 5 3 3 4 1 46 1 A2 12 2 2 (OPTION)
+3.3VA -12VA +5.1VA DQ3 TXOUT2 D[2] /CS0 D[2] H1PWR1-0 H1PWR1 +24VD2 NC J532
A10 6 6 4 4 5 1 1 2 45 2 A3 11 3 3 A1 1
RESERVED +5.1VA +3.3VA +5VA D[4] DWNLED D[4] H1PWR2-0 H1PWR2 CTRON-0A SG
A11 7 7 6 2 2 3 44 3 A4 10 4 4 A2 2 4
+5.1VA DQ4 +12VB D[6] A02 D[6] H1PWR3-0 H1PWR3 CTRCNT-0 KCTRC-0
A12 8 8 7 3 3 CN503 4 43 4 A5 9 5 5 A3 3 3
+3.3VA DQ5 +3.3VB + RD-0 A04 RD-0 NC H2PWR1 MCRUM-0 +24VD2 KEY COPY COUNTER
A13 9 9 8 4 4 1 5 42 5 A6 8 6 6 A4 4 2
COIN-
+3.3VAUX OPBINT(2) STANADARD DQ6 MOD2DMA-1 SPEAKER - A[0] A06 A[0] NC H2PWR2 EXTCTR-0 KCTRO-0
A14 10 10 9 5 5 2 6 41 6 A7 7 7 7 A5 5 1
RST# OPBINT(0) DQ7 SG A[2] A08 A[2] NC H2PWR3 PS-IH PG NC
A15 11 11 10 6 6 7 40 7 A8 6 8 8 A6 6
CONTROLLER
+3.3VA SG CN112 CN170 DQ8 MEM2CS-0 A[4] A10 A[4] NC
CN2 A16 12 12 11 7 7 8 39 8 A9 5 9
GNT# PCICLK(5) /RESET SG +5.1VB A[6] A12 A[6] NC CN456
1 A17 13 13 1 1 12 8 8 9 38 9 B1 4 10
SG SG SG DQ9 MEMRD2-0 A[8] A14 A[8] H2PWR1-0 IH1ON BKCTR-0 CN308 J529 J203
2 A18 14 14 2 2 13 9 9 10 37 10 B2 3 11 1 A7
RME# PCICLK(3) DD7 DQ10 CLKOE-1 A[10] A16 A[10] H2PWR2-0 SG MNCTR-0 POMPL-0 POMCK-0
3 A19 15 15 3 3 14 10 10 11 36 11 B3 2 12 2 A8 1 5 1 5
AD[30] SG DD8 DQ11 TXEN2-1 A[12] A18 A[12] H2PWR3-0 NC FLCTR-0 POMON-0A POMPL-0
4 A20 16 16 4 4 15 11 11 12 35 12 B4 1 13 3 B1 2 4 2 4
+3.3VA REQ(1)# DD6 DQ12 +5.1VB A[14] A20 A[14] IH1ON-0A H1ERR1 SG POMCK-0A POMON-0 M/DC-POL
B 5 A21 17 17 5 5 16 12 12 13 34 13 B5 4 B2 3 3 3 3 M B
AD[28] REQ(0)# DD9 DQ13 A[16] A[16] DATA15 A[16] SG H1ERR2 TSIZE3 PG PG
6 A22 18 18 6 6 17 13 13 14 33 14 B6 5 B3 4 2 4 2
AD[26] +3.3VA DD5 +3.3VA A[14] A[18] DATA13 A[18] NC TSIZE2 +24VD1 +24VD1
7 A23 19 19 7 7 18 14 14 15 32 15 B7 B4 5 1 5 1
SG AD[31] DD10 DQ14 A[12] SG DATA11 SG H1ERR1-0 TSIZE1
8 A24 20 20 8 8 19 15 15 CN501 16 31 16 B8 B5
AD[24] AD[29] DD4 DQ15 A[10] TXOUT SG DATA9 SG H1ERR2-0 TSIZE0
9 A25 21 21 9 9 20 16 16 1 1 17 30 17 B9 B6
DOWNLOAD JIG(FAX)
14 A30 26 26 14 14 25 21 21 6 6 22 25 22 A3 9 3
DOWNLOAD JIG(LGC)
10.2 DC Wire Harness (e-STUDIO350/450)
THM-2
AD[18] AD[23] DD1 +3.3VA +5.1VB RLADJ1 A[1] SG A[1] ETH+-1A ETH+-1A CN309 CN204 CN206 CN201
15 A31 27 27 15 15 26 22 22 7 7 23 24 23 A4 8 4 THMS-
AD[16] SG DD14 /WE CEP1RST-0 RLADJ2 A[3] +3.3VA A[3] ETH--1A ETH--1A S-HTR SG SG
16 A32 28 28 16 16 27 23 23 8 8 24 23 24 A5 7 5 (OPTION) 1 18 1 1
+3.3VA AD[21] DD0 DQMB0 +5.1VB RGCLK A[5] +3.3VA A[5] NC +5.1VB CN525 +5.1VD +5.1VD
17 A33 29 29 17 17 28 24 24 9 9 25 22 25 A6 6 6 J621 2 17 2 2
FRAME# AD[19] DD15 DQMB1 SG AG A[7] CS7-B A[7] NC EXTSW-1A CN303 +5.1VD +5.1VD
DOWNLOAD JIG(SYS)
18 A34 30 30 18 18 29 25 25 10 10 26 21 26 A7 5 7 1 1 3 16 3 3
SG +3.3VA SG /CS0 CEPCLK -12VB A[9] CS7-A A[9] +5.1VB EXIT-SNR CLKC-1A SG SG
19 A35 31 31 19 19 30 26 26 11 11 27 20 27 A8 2 3 A1 4 15 4 4
TRDY# AD[17] NC(KEY) NC SG AG A[11] RDX A[11] EXTSW-1 SG CLKB-1A WRLVL-1 WRLVL-1
20 A36 32 32 20 20 31 27 27 12 12 28 19 28 A9 4 8 3 5 A2 5 14 5 5
SG C/BE(2)# MDARQ SG D[0] +12VB A[13] A03 A[13] SG +24VD2 SCSWC-0A SG SG
21 A37 33 33 21 21 32 28 28 13 13 29 18 29 A10 3 9 J640 7 A3 6 13 6 6
STOP# SG SG A0 D[2] +24VB A[15] A05 A[15] +24VD2 FUSFN-0A DRV7-1A BDIN-1 NC
22 A38 34 34 22 22 33 29 29 14 14 30 17 30 A11 2 10 1 FUS- 9 A4 7 12 7 7
+3.3VA IRDY# /DIOW A2 D[4] 16Hz A[17] A07 A[17] FUSFN-0A FAN-MOT M DRV6-1A SG SG
23 A39 35 35 23 23 34 30 30 NCU 15 15 31 16 31 A12 2 11 A5 8 11 8 8
PWA-F-LRL
SCRAMBLER BOARD
25 A41 37 37 25 25 36 32 32 17 17 33 14 33 A13 1 11 15 A7 10 9 10 10
SG SG SG A8 D[10] ANSDET LEDDL-0 A13 ROMLD-1 DRV3-1A SG SG
26 A42 38 38 26 26 37 33 33 18 18 34 13 34 17 A8 11 8 11 11
Board to Board
PAR LOCK# IORDY A10 D[12] REVA CN101 A15 J510 DRV2-1A WRAPC-0 WRAPC-0
27 A43 39 39 27 27 38 34 34 19 19 CN701 12 19 A9 12 7 12 12
AD[15] PERR# SG BA1 D[14] REVB +5.1VB A17 +24VD2 +24VD2 DRV1-1A +5.1VB NC
28 A44 40 40 28 28 39 35 35 20 20 1 1 11 A14 1 21 A10 13 6 13 13
+3.3VA +3.3VA /DMACK +3.3VA SG INTHOOK DA1 A19 EXTMA-0A EXTMA-0A DRV0-1A SHDWM-1 SHDWM-1
Board to Board
37 A53 49 49 37 37 48 44 44 29 29 10 10 2 J512 30 B3 J516
AD[06] SG /CS1 +3.3VA MD2INT-1 PG SG DATA0 RLC2S-0 SIZE1-0A CN305 NC NC
38 A54 50 50 38 38 49 45 45 30 30 11 11 1 B1 15 28 B4 7 1 J518
AD[04] AD[8] /DASP NC MOD2CS-0 DD12 +5.1VB SIZE2-0A SG SG
39 A55 51 51 39 39 50 46 46 12 12 B2 14 26 B5 A1 6 2 3
SG AD[7] SG NC MOD2RST-0 SG RLHSW-0 SIZE3-0A CUEMP-1 CUEMP-1 EMP-
40 A56 52 52 40 40 51 47 47 13 13 B3 13 24 B6 A2 5 3 2 U-SNR
AD[02] +3.3VA NC SG SG CN117 CN321 RLTRS-0 RETS0-0A +5.1VB +5.1VB
A57 53 53 52 48 48 14 14 B4 12 22 B7 A3 4 4 1
AD[00] AD[5] NC RXEN2-1 SG +5.1VB JSPSW-0 RETS1-0A
A58 54 54 53 49 49 CN502 15 15 A1 A17 B5 11 20 B8
A +3.3VA AD[3] A SG MEMWRH2-0 TXB SG CBSY-0 RLCNT-0 RETS2-0A
A59 55 55 54 50 50 1 1 16 16 A2 A16 B6 10 18 B9 J519
REQ64# SG DQ16 MEMWRL2-0 RXIN SG CMD-0 OPCHK1 RETS3-0A SG SG
A60 56 56 55 51 51 2 2 17 17 A3 A15 B7 9 JOB SEPARATOR/ 16 B10 A4 3 5 3
+5.1VA AD[1] DQ17 A[18] CML SG SACK-0 RLCSW-0 RETS4-0A CUTOP-1 CUTOP-1 CST-U-
A61 57 57 56 52 52 3 3 18 18 A4 A14 B8 8 OFFSET TRAY/ 14 B11 A5 2 6 2 TRY-CLT
+5.1VA +3.3VA DQ18 A[17] LD +3.3VB SERR-0 SG RETS5-0A +5.1VB +5.1VB
A62 58 58 57 53 53 4 4 19 19 A5 A13 B9 7 BRIDGE UNIT 12 B12 A6 1 7 1
-12VA +5.1VA DQ19 A[15] ER/HK INTRQ SBSY-0 JFSL2ON RETS6-0A
PCI
B1 59 59 58 54 54 5 5 20 20 A6 A12 B10 6 10 B13 J517
TCK SG +3.3VA A[13] ATT3DB +3.3VB STS-0 GASOL-0A RETS7-0A NC NC
B2 60 60 59 55 55 6 6 21 21 A7 A11 B11 5 8 B14 6 1 J521
PCI SLOT(1)
SG +3.3VA DQ20 A[11] RLADJ1 +5.1VA CACK-0 +24VD2 SCSWB-0A CURGC-0A CURGC-0
1st.DRAWER
PCI SLOT(0)
B3 61 61 60 56 56 7 7 22 22 A8 A10 B12 4 6 B15 A7 5 2 2 CST-U-
TD0 +3.3VA NC A[9] RLADJ2 -12VB CERR-0 PG +24VD1 +24VD1 FEED-CLT
B4 62 62 61 57 57 8 8 23 23 A9 A9 B13 3 4 A8 4 3 1
+5.1VA +3.3VA NC A[7] RGCLK SG SG OFFSET2 LCCNT-0
B5 63 63 62 58 58 9 9 24 24 A10 A8 B14 2 2 B16
+5.1VA SG CKE1 A[5] AG +12VB SG OFFSET1
B6 64 64 63 59 59 10 10 25 25 A11 A7 B15 1 CN526 J620
INTB# +12VA SG A[3] -12VB DA0 SG SG SG
B7 65 65 64 60 60 11 11 26 26 A12 A6 1 A9 3 4 3
INTD# +12VA DQ21 A[1] AG DA2 IRCLK-1 CUFLS-1 CUFLS-0 NEMP-
B8 66 66 65 61 61 12 12 27 27 A13 A5 J513 2 A10 2 5 2 U-SNR
PRSNT1# +5.1VA DQ22 CPURST-0 +12VB IDECS SG +24VD2 +5.1VB +5.1VB
B9 67 67 66 62 62 13 13 28 28 A14 A4 B16 1 IH- 3 A11 1 6 1
RESERVED +5.1VA DQ23 CEP2INT-1 NC DD1 IHSYNC-0 IHFN-0A FAN-MOT M
D B10 68 68 67 63 63 14 14 29 29 A15 A3 B17 2 4 J576 D
PRSNT2# +3.3VA SG +5.1VB 16Hz DD2 SG NC NC
B11 69 69 68 64 64 NCU 15 15 30 30 A16 A2 7 1 J518
OPBINT(1) DQ24 +5.1VB AG DD4 IVSYNC-0 SG SG
B12 70 70 69 65 65 (2) 16 16 31 31 A17 A1 B1 6 2 3
+3.3VA DQ25 IORD2-0 CI DD5 MCNT-1 CPSW2-0 CLEMP-1 CLEMP-1 EMP-
B13 71 71 70 66 66 17 17 32 32 B1 B17 B18 B1 5 3 2 L-SNR
RESERVED PCIRST# DQ26 IOWR2-0 ANSDET DD7 SYSRST-0 SG +5.1VB +5.1VB
PWA-F-SYS
B14 72 72 71 67 67 18 18 33 33 B2 B16 B19 B3 4 4 1
Board to Board
SG +3.3VA DQ27 D[1] REVA DD8 IDATX[0]
B15 73 73 72 68 68 19 19 34 34 B3 B15
CLK PCICLK(4) +3.3VA D[3] REVB DD10 IDATX[1] e-STUDIO350 ONLY
B16 74 74 73 69 69 20 20 35 35 B4 B14 J519
SG +3.3VA DQ28 D[5] NC DD11 IDATX[2] SG SG
PWA-F-LGC
B17 75 75 74 70 70 21 21 36 36 B5 B13 B4 3 5 3
REQ# GNT(1)# DQ29 D[7] NC DD13 IDATX[3] CLTOP-1 CLTOP-1 CST-L-
B18 76 76 75 71 71 22 22 37 37 B6 B12 J564 B5 2 6 2 TRY-CLT
+3.3VA GNT(0)# DQ30 D[9] +5.1VA DD14 IDATX[4] ADUCL-0 FG FG +5.1VB +5.1VB
B19 77 77 76 72 72 23 23 38 38 B7 B11 2 B6 1 7 1
AD[31] SG DQ31 D[11] AG DD15 IDATX[5] ADU-CLT +24VD1
B20 78 78 77 73 73 24 24 39 39 B8 B10 CN320 J565 1 J577
AD[29] PME# SG D[13] +5VA /DIOR IDATX[6] DV2FN-0A NC NC
B21 79 79 78 74 74 25 25 40 40 B9 B9 2 2 DEV- J312 CN213 6 1 J521
SG AD[30] CLK2 D[15] -12VB /DIOW IDATX[7] +24VD2 M SG CLRGC-0 CLRGC-0
2nd.DRAWER
05/11
B26 84 84 83 79 79 30 30 45 45 B14 B4 B16 1 3 1 3 1 17 1 17 B9 3 4 3
AD[23] AD[24] +3.3VA DACKD2-0 NC SG TBFL-1 TBLF-1 USD-TNR- ADU- ADUFU +24VD1 CLFLS-0 CLFLS-0 NEMP-
B27 85 85 84 80 80 46 46 B15 B3 B15 2 2 2 FLL-SNR1 TRU-SNR 2 2 CN211 CN562 16 2 16 B10 2 5 2 L-SNR
SG +3.3VA SG CN702 FXWP IVDEN-0 SG SG +5.1VB ADCOV-1 ADCOV-1 +5.1VB +5.1VB
B28 86 86 85 47 47 B16 B2 B14 3 1 3 1 3 1 15 3 15 B11 1 6 1
AD[21] +3.3VA DQ32 +24VB SG +3.3VB ADTR1-1 ADTR1-1
DIMM(0)
B29 87 87 86 3 1 48 48 B17 B1 J553 CN215 2 14 4 14
AD[19] AD[22] DQ33 PG SG BTLSW-1 BTLSW-1 +24VD1 ADCNT-1 ADCNT-1
B30 88 88 87 2 2 49 49 B13 1 1 3 13 5 13
+3.3VA AD[20] DQ34 NC FAX NC NC FDMA SG SG
Board to Board
Board to Board
B31 89 89 88 1 3 50 50 2 TNR-SW 2 4 12 6 12
AD[17] SG DQ35 SG SG ADU-MOT FDMB PWA- +5.1VB +5.1VB CN306
B32 90 90 89 B12 3 M 3 5 11 7 11
C/BE(2)# AD[18] +3.3VA FDMC F-ADU ADTR2-1 ADTR2-1 NC
B33 91 91 90 J542 J508 4 6 10 8 10 A1
SG AD[16] DQ36 SG SG FDMD CRT-DOWNA CRT-DOWNA NC
B34 92 92 91 B11 1 5 1 SIDE-COV- 5 7 9 9 9 A2 J515
IRDY# +3.3VA DQ37 CN14 CN1 CN10 SDCSW-1 SDCSW-1 SW ADM2A-0A ADM2A-0A CLTRM-0A
B35 93 93 92 J34 B10 2 4 2 CN216 8 8 10 8 A3 1
+3.3VA FRAME# DQ38 +5.1VB NC ADM2C-0A ADM2C-0A CLTRM-1A TRY-MOT M
E B36 94 94 93 26 1 2 A1 J509 1 9 7 11 7 A4 2 E
DEVSEL# SG DQ39 +5.1VB RESERVED +24VD4 CN4 CN102 +5.1VB +5.1VB ADM2B-0A ADM2B-0A
B37 95 95 94 25 2 1 A2 B9 3 3 1 2 10 6 12 6
SG TRDY# DQ40 SG FANSLG SYSRST CLFED-1 CLFED-1 ADM2D-0A ADM2D-0A
B38 96 96 95 24 3 J33 A3 20 1 B8 4 2 2 FED-L-SNR NC 3 11 5 13 5 J523
LOCK# SG SG SG +5VAPS SCTS SG SG +24VD1 CUTRC-0B
B39 97 97 96 23 4 3 A4 19 2 B7 5 1 3 4 CN212 CN563 4 14 4 A5 1 CST-TR-
PERR# STOP# DQ41 CCDRS APSR STXD +24VD1 +24VD1 +24VD1 L-CLT
B40 98 98 97 22 5 APS-R 2 A5 18 3 J550 J506 5 1 3 15 3 A6 2
+3.3VA +3.3VA DQ42 SG SG SRXD +5.1VB +5.1VB +24VD1 PG
B41 99 99 98 21 6 1 A6 17 4 B6 1 6 1 CN311 CN217 2 2 16 2
SERR# +3.3VA DQ43 CCDCP SRTS CUFED-1 CUFED-1 SG PG PG
B42 100 100 99 20 7 J32 16 5 B5 2 5 2 FED-U-SNR ADU- 1 2 3 1 17 1 J522
+3.3VA SG DQ44 SG +5VAPS SCNT SG SG SET-SW COVSW PG CFEDC-0A
B43 101 101 100 19 8 3 A7 15 6 B4 3 4 3 2 1 4 A7 1 CST-TR-
C/BE(1)# SG DQ45 CCDSH APSC SG CN122 CN412 CN413 CN307 +24VD1 H-CLT
B44 102 102 101 18 9 APS-C 2 A8 14 7 J507 A8 2
AD[14] PAR +3.3VA SG SG SVDEN PWR-DN +3.3VB +5.1VB +5.1VB
B45 103 103 102 17 10 1 A9 13 8 26 1 1 1 B3 4 3 1
SG AD[15] DQ46 CCDCK2B SDCLK PWR-EN SG PSTPC-1 PSTPC-1
B46 104 104 103 16 11 J31 12 9 25 2 2 2 B2 5 2 2 RGST-SNR AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT J514
AD[12] +3.3VA DQ47 SG +5VAPS SHDEN SG +5.1VB SG SG SG
B47 105 105 104 15 12 3 B1 11 10 24 3 3 3 B1 6 1 3 A9 1
AD[10] AD[13] NC CCDCK2A APS3 SG -12VB +5.1VB NC CUSW-0 CST-U-SW
B48 106 106 105 14 13 APS3 2 B2 10 11 23 4 4 4 A17 J632 J631 CN545 A10 2
M66EN AD[11] NC SG SG SG SG SG NC +5.1VB NC NC NC
B49 107 107 106 13 14 1 B3 9 12 22 5 5 5 A16 J504 1 3 1 18 1 36
SG SG CN108 SG CCDCK1A SCD7 +12VB SG RGTCL-0A SFB- SFBFED SFSSW
B50 108 108 107 12 15 J30 8 13 21 6 6 6 A15 2 FED-SNR 2 2 2 17 2 35 J524
SG AD[9] STB NC SG +5VAPS SCD6 SG +12VB +24VD2 RGT-CLT SG +5.1VB SG
B51 109 109 1 108 11 16 3 B4 7 14 20 7 7 7 A14 1 3 1 3 16 3 34 A11 1
AD[08] SG DATA0 NC CCD-EVEN APS2 SCD5 +12VA SG SFBFED-1 CLSW-0 CST-L-SW
PWA-F-CCD
B52 110 110 2 109 10 17 APS2 2 B5 6 15 19 8 8 8 J533 J629 15 4 33 A12 2
AD[07] C/BE(0)# DATA1 +3.3VA SG SG SCD4 SG PDWN-1A TNRMT-1A COLSFB SG NC
B53 111 111 3 110 9 18 1 B6 5 16 18 9 9 9 A13 1 2 14 5 32 A13
+3.3VA +3.3VA DATA2 /CAS CCD-ODD SCD3 -12VA PWRFN-0A TNRMT-0A TNR-MOT M SFB-SOL +24VD1 SOLSFB-0A
B54 112 112 4 111 8 19 4 17 17 10 10 10 A12 2 1 13 6 31
AD[05] AD[6] DATA3 DQMB4 SG SCD2 SG +5.1VB +24VD1 NC
B55 113 113 5 112 7 20 J29 3 18 16 11 11 J554 J628 12 7 30 B1 CN551
AD[03] AD[4] DATA4 DQMB5 AG A4 +5VAPS SCD1 SG SG DEVCL-0A CLSFB SFBCL-0A +24VD1
B56 114 114 6 113 6 21 3 B7 2 19 15 12 12 A11 2 SFB- 2 11 8 29 B2 1
SG SG DATA5 /CS1 AG SERIES APS1 SCD0 +3.3VA +24VB +24VD2 DEV-CLT +24VD1 +24VD1 PG
B57 115 115 7 114 5 22 APS1 2 B8 1 20 14 13 13 A10 1 FEED-CLT 1 10 9 28 B3 2 OUT1 1 1 MAIN CHARGER WIRE
AD[01] AD[2] DATA6 /RAS AG ONLY SG +3.3VA PG SG HVTM-0A
B58 116 116 8 115 4 23 1 B9 13 14 14 J549 J630 9 10 27 B4 3
+3.3VA AD[0] DATA7 SG +12VB +3.3VA DEVFN-0A SG SWBSW-1 HVMVR-1A
B59 117 117 9 116 3 24 12 15 A9 2 DEV- 3 8 11 26 B5 4 OUT2 1 1 MAIN CHARGER GRID
ACK64# +3.3VA NACK A1 +12VB +3.3VA CN414 +24VD2 M SFB-SNR SFBSW +5.1VB HVTD-0A
B60 118 118 10 117 2 25 CN22 11 16 A8 1 FAN-MOT1 2 7 12 25 B6 5
+5.1VA +5.1VA BUSY A3 +12VB MDT[0] SG +24VD1 +5.1VB HVDVR-1A
B61 119 119 11 118 1 26 1 1 10 17 1 11 J505 1 B7 6 OUT3 1 1 DEVELOPER BIAS
F +5.1VA +5.1VA PERROR A5 MDT[2] SG +24VD1 +5.1VB J507 HVTT-0A PS-HVT F
B62 120 120 12 119 2 2 9 18 2 12 1 J619 B8 7
SELECT A7 MDT[4] +3.3VB PG SG SFSZ3-0 SFSZ3 HVTVR-1A
13 120 3 3 8 19 3 13 2 1 1 5 6 13 24 B9 8 OUT4 1 1 TRANSFER BIAS
NATFD A9 MDT[6] +3.3VB PG MAMON-0A SFSZ2-0 SFSZ2 HVTGB-0A
14 121 4 4 7 20 4 14 3 2 2 4 5 14 23 B10 9
NC A11 MRD SG +24VD2 MAMCK-1A MAMCK-0A SFSZ1-0 SFSZ1 HVTSP-0A
15 122 5 5 6 21 5 A7 4 PWA-F-SFB 3 3 3 4 15 22 B11 10 OUT5 1 1 TRANSFER GUIDE BIAS
SG BA0 PNLDT0 SG +24VD2 +5.1VB MAMCW-0A SFSZ0-0 SFSZ0 HVSAV-1A
J527 16 123 6 6 5 22 6 A6 5 4 4 2 3 16 21 B12 11
J423 J427 J526 J523 CN118 FG +3.3VA PNLDT2 +5.1VA PG SG MAMPL-0A SG SG HVTSTS
17 124 7 7 4 23 7 A5 6 MAIN-MOT 5 5 1 2 17 20 B13 12 OUT6 1 1 SEPARATION BIAS
CCFL+ XSCL-1A XSCL-1A LOGIC NC(CLK1) MAD[4] SG PG MAMON-0A NC M SG
1 A15 A1 A15 1 18 125 8 8 3 24 8 A4 7 1 18 19
LCD
LP-1A LP-1A SG A12 MAD[6] +5.1VA +5.1VD MAMCW-0A PG
2 A14 A2 A14 2 19 126 9 9 2 25 9 15 A3 8 CHARGER CASE BIAS
PWA-F-SLG
CCFL- WE-1A WF-1A SG SG MAD[8] +5.1VB SG MAMBK-0A PG FG FG
3 A13 A3 A13 3 20 127 10 10 1 26 10 16 A2 9 FG
BACK LIGHT
YP-1A YD-1A SG CKE MAD[10] MAMPL-1 +24VD2
A12 A4 A12 4 21 128 11 11 17 A1 10
J422 SG INVGND SG /CS3 MAD[12] +24VD2
PC I/F(IEEE1284)
A11 A5 A11 5 22 129 12 12 18 11 BYPASS UNIT
YD BZON-0A BZON-0A SG DQMB6 MAD[14] MAMBK-0A
1 A10 A6 A10 6 23 130 13 13 CN301 12
XL CPPOW-0A CPPOW-1A SG DQMB7 MAD[16] PG
2 A9 A7 A9 7 24 131 14 14 8
XR LDCLKA LDCLK-1A SG NC(A13) MAD[18] PG
3 A8 A8 A8 8 25 132 15 15 7 J552
YU LDDAT-0A LDDAT-1A SG +3.3VA SG PG
4 A7 A9 A7 9 26 133 16 16 6 4 4 CN317 J557 J535
PANEL
TOUCH
LDLTH-0A LDLTH-1A SG NC SG PG ATSSW-0
A6 A10 A6 10 27 134 17 17 5 3 3 A1 A10 A1 8 1 J546
J424 LDON1-0A LDON1-0A SG NC MDT[1] +24VD2 ATSVR-1A ATSVR-1A
A5 A11 A5 11 28 135 18 18 4 2 2 A2 A9 A2 7 2 1
FRAWE LDON0-0A LDON0-0A SG NC MDT[3] +24VD2 +24VD2 +24VD2
1 A4 A12 A4 12 29 136 19 19 3 1 1 A3 A8 A3 6 3 2
LOAD SG SG SG NC MDT[5] +24VD2 ATS-1A ATS-1A ATTNR-SNR
2 A3 A13 A3 13 30 137 20 20 2 A4 A7 A4 5 4 3
CP +5.1VA +5.1VA NINIT SG MDT[7] CN6 CN415 +24VD2 SG SG
3 A2 A14 A2 14 31 138 21 21 J40 1 A5 A6 A5 4 5 4
SG +5.1VA +5.1VA NFAULT DQ48 PNLCS SG SG SG
PS-ACC
DOWNLOAD JIG(SLG)
4 A1 A15 A1 15 32 139 22 22 1 22 22 24 A6 A5 A6 3 6
+5.1VA +5.1VA +5.1VA NC DQ49 LP-EXPO PNLDT1 SG SG
5 B15 B1 B15 16 33 140 23 23 2 21 21 23 J547
SG +5.1VA +5.1VA NC DQ50 PNLDT3 +5.1VB +5.1VB DRTH-0A DRTH-0A
6 B14 B2 B14 17 34 141 24 24 3 20 20 22 A7 A4 A7 2 7 2 THMS-
VEE RSTCP-0A CPRST-0A NC DQ51 MAD[5] +5.1VB +5.1VB SG SG DRM
7 B13 B3 B13 18 35 142 25 25 4 19 19 21 A8 A3 A8 1 8 1
D.OFF SG SG NSELIN +3.3VA MAD[7] SG SG FRDSW-0
8 B12 B4 B12 19 36 143 26 26 5 18 18 20 J527 A9
LCD PANEL
D0 RTS1-0A RTS0-0A DQ52 MAD[9] SG SG POLFN-0A SG NC
9 B11 B5 B11 20 144 27 27 6 17 17 19 2 (OPTION) J1 CN313 A10 A2 A9
1
2
3
4
G LSU-FAN-MOT G
CN21
D1 CTS1-0A CTS0-0A NC MAD[11] +3.3VB +3.3VB +24VD1 M SG RSTSW-0A NC
10 B10 B6 B10 21 145 CN9 CN20 28 28 7 16 16 18 1 1 1 A11 A1 A10
D2 SOUT0-1A SOUT[0] CN109 CN172 NC PG MAD[13] +3.3VB +3.3VB +5.1VB +24VD2
11 B9 B7 B9 22 146 1 1 29 29 8 15 15 17 2 2 A12 J562
D3 SIN0-1A SIN[0] TXD NC PG MAD[15] AG SG AD0 SG SG
12 B8 B8 B8 23 1 3 147 2 2 30 30 9 14 14 16 3 3 A13 B10 B1 1
SG SG RXD SG LMPON-A INV-EXP MAD[17] +12VB +12VB AD2 TBNFL-1 TBNFL-1 USD-TNR-
B7 B9 B7 24 2 2 148 3 3 31 31 10 13 13 15 4 4 A14 B9 B2 2 FLL-SNR2
J429 J426 UD3-1A UD3-1A RTS DQ53 +24VD4 ROMDT PG NC AD4 +5.1VB +5.1VB
B6 B10 B6 25 3 7 149 4 4 32 32 11 14 5 5 A15 B8 B3 3
SCN15 UD2-1A UD2-1A DSR DQ54 +24VD4 +5.1VB PG NC AD6
1 1 B5 B11 B5 26 4 6 150 5 5 33 33 12 13 6 6
SCN14 UD1-1A UD1-1A DTR DQ55 LED +24VD4 PG I/FO00 +24VD2
2 2 B4 B12 B4 27 5 4 151 34 34 13 12 12 12 7 7 B1 J539
SCN13 UD0-1A UD0-1A CTS SG +24VD4 PG I/O02 ERSLP-0A +24VD2
3 3 B3 B13 B3 28 6 8 152 14 11 11 11 8 8 B2 1 MID-
RS-232C
SCN12 SG SG CNT DQ56 +24VD4 I/O04 +24VD2 MIDFN-0A M
PWA-F-DSP
4 4 B2 B14 B2 29 7 1 153 10 10 10 9 9 B3 B7 B4 2 FAN-MOT
(D-sub 9pin)
SCN11 LCDEN-1A LCDEN-1A SG DQ57 +24VD4 I/O06 MIIDFN-0A J538
5 5 B1 B15 B1 30 8 5 154 9 9 9 10 10 B4 B6 B5 J503
RET0 NC DQ58 CN416 CN531 SG +24VD2 +24VD2
6 6 9 155 11 11 B5 B5 B6 4 1 1 EXT-
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CN2
CN7
CN19
RET2 +3.3VA SG SG CSIP2-0A
8 8 157 2 2 2 13 13 J544
RET3 CN119 DQ60 +24VD5 +24VD5 +5.1VB +24VD2 +24VD2
9 9 158 3 3 3 14 14 B7 B3 B8 2 3 1 SP-
RET8 VBUS DQ61 PG PG IPCSW-0 SPFN-0A SPFN-0A
SG
SG
10 10 1 159 4 4 4 15 15 B8 B2 B9 1 4 2 FAN-MOT M
DFAK
DFRQ
DFTXD
DFRAK
DFCNT
DFRXD
DFRRQ
+24VD4
+24VD4
SCNM-B
SCNM-A
DFSCST
RET9 D- DQ62 SG NC
SCNM-BB
SCNM-AB
IPC
SG
PLTN
+5.1VB
SG
HOME
+5.1VB
D+ DQ63 +5.1VB NC +24VD2
3 161 17 17 B10 2
USB
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
2
1
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
LP-ERS
J36
J35
J37
10
DEVICE
4 162 18 18 1
J45
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
PLTN-
HOME-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN2
10
11
PWA-F-KEY
4 4 166 11 11 1 1 8 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 22 22 J541
LDFC-6 SA2 SG SG NC NC PWA-F- NAD,SAD,TWD TXD TXD I/O03 RSTSW-0A
5 5 167 1 12 12 2 2 7 7 7 2 2 2 3 3 23 23 6 3 2 MAIN-SW
LDFC-7 +3.3VA +5.1VB +5.1VB SG SG FIL MODELS :STANDARD SG SG I/O05 +24VD2 (RESET)
6 6 168 2 13 13 3 3 6 6 6 3 3 5 5 3 4 4 24 24 5 4 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
USB HOST
SG NC D+ PG PG
16 16 7 7 2 2
SG +24VB +24VB
8 3 1
JPD MODEL ONLY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10.3 Connector Table (e-STUDIO350/450)
CN301 PWA-F-LGC (CN301) <-> MAIN-MOT, PS-ACC(CN414) CN314 PWA-F-LGC (CN314) <-> COIN CONTROLLER (OPTION)/COPY CN112 PWA-F-SYS (CN112) <-> HDD (CN170) (STANDARD) CN121 PWA-F-SYS (CN121) <-> PWA-F-NIC (J3) CN1 PWA-F-SLG (CN1) <-> PWA-F-CCD (CN14) CN501 FAX (CN501) <-> NCU (1) (OPTION)
Pin No Symbol Name Active KEY CARD (OPTION) Pin No Symbol Name Active Pin No Symbol Name Active Pin No Symbol Name Active Pin No Symbol Name Active
1 +24VD2 +24V - Pin No Symbol Name Active 1 /RESET Reset signal - 1 +3.3VA +3.3V - 1 +5.1VB +5V - 1 TXOUT Transmitted FAX data -
2 +24VD2 +24V - A1 +24VD2 +24V - 2 SG Signal ground - 2 +3.3VA +3.3V - 2 +5.1VB +5V - 2 RXIN Received FAX data -
3 +24VD2 +24V - A2 CTRON-0 Total counter ON signal - 3 DD7 Data bus [7] - 3 +3.3VA +3.3V - 3 SG Signal ground - 3 CML CML relay drive signal -
4 +24VD2 +24V - A3 CTRCNT-0 Copy permitting signal L 4 DD8 Data bus [8] - 4 NC (/CS2P) Not connected - 4 SG Signal ground - 4 LD Dial pulse drive signal -
5 PG Power ground - A4 MCRUN-0 Copying operation signal L 5 DD6 Data bus [6] - 5 D15 I/F data bus [15] - 5 CCDRS CCD RS signal - 5 EXTRG RG relay drive signal -
6 PG Power ground - A5 EXTCTR-0 Exit sensor ON signal L 6 DD9 Data bus [9] - 6 D14 I/F data bus [14] - 6 SG Signal ground - 6 ATT3DB -3db ATT exchange signal -
7 PG Power ground - A6 PG Power ground - 7 DD5 Data bus [5] - 7 D13 I/F data bus [13] - 7 CCDCP CCD CP signal - 7 RLADJ1 MODEM select signal -
8 PG Power ground - A7 BKCTR-0 Black and white mode counter ON signal L 8 DD10 Data bus [10] - 8 SG Signal ground - 8 SG Signal ground - 8 RLADJ2 MODEM select signal -
A8 MNCTR-0 Mono-color mode counter ON signal L 9 DD4 Data bus [4] - 9 D12 I/F data bus [12] - 9 CCDSH CCD TG signal - 9 RGCLK Not used -
CN302 PWA-F-LGC (CN302) <-> JOB SEPARATOR (OPTION)/OFFSET B1 FLCTR-0 Full color mode counter ON signal L 10 DD11 Data bus [11] - 10 D11 I/F data bus [11] - 10 SG Signal ground - 10 AG Analog ground -
11 DD3 Data bus [3] - 11 D10 I/F data bus [10] - 11 CCDCK2B CCD shift clock-2B - 11 -12VB -12V -
TRAY (OPTION)/BRIDGE UNIT (OPTION), IH-FAN-MOT, EXIT- B2 SG Signal ground -
12 DD12 Data bus [12] - 12 SG Signal ground - 12 SG Signal ground - 12 AG Analog ground -
B3 SIZE3 Paper size signal-3 -
MOT, FUS-FAN-MOT, EXIT-SNR,THMS-S-HTR, THMS-C-HTR B4 SIZE2 Paper size signal-2 - 13 DD2 Data bus [2] - 13 D09 I/F data bus [9] - 13 CCDCK2A CCD shift clock-2A - 13 +12VB +12V -
Pin No Symbol Name Active B5 SIZE1 Paper size signal-1 - 14 DD13 Data bus [13] - 14 D08 I/F data bus [8] - 14 SG Signal ground - 14 +24VB +24V -
A1 FUSSW-1A Paper exit unit connection detection signal H B6 SIZE0 Paper size signal-0 - 15 DD1 Data bus [1] - 15 /INTPR1 Interrupt PR1 signal L 15 CCDCK1A CCD shift clock-1A - 15 16Hz Not used -
A2 MTH+-1A Fuser roller center thermistor detection signal Analog B7 +5.1VB +5V - 16 DD14 Data bus [14] - 16 SG Signal ground - 16 SG Signal ground - 16 AG Analog ground -
A3 MTH--1A Fuser roller center thermistor detection signal Analog B8 CTRCNT2 Copy key card detection signal - 17 DD0 Data bus [0] - 17 A03 I/F address bus [3] - 17 CCD-EVEN CCD even data - 17 CI Ring signal detection L
A4 ETH+-1A Fuser roller side thermistor detection signal Analog 18 DD15 Data bus [15] - 18 A02 I/F address bus [2] - 18 SG Signal ground - 18 ANSDET Facsimile data answer detection L
A5 ETH--1A Fuser roller side thermistor detection signal Analog 19 SG Signal ground - 19 A01 I/F address bus [1] - 19 CCD-ODD CCD odd data - 19 REVA Line 1 External telephone hook detection signal -
A6 NC Not connected -
CN315 PWA-F-LGC (CN315) <-> KEY COPY COUNTER (OPTION) 20 NC(KEY) Not connected - 20 NC (SRXD) Not connected - 20 SG Signal ground - 20 REVB Line 1 External telephone hook detection signal -
A7 NC Not connected - Pin No Symbol Name Active 21 MDARQ DMA request signal H 21 A00 I/F address bus [0] - 21 AG Analog ground - 21 INTHOOK Internal telephone hook signal -
A8 +5.1VB +5V - 1 NC Not connected - 22 SG Signal ground - 22 D07 I/F data bus [7] - 22 AG Analog ground - 22 EXTHO OK External telephone hook signal -
A9 EXTSW-1 Exit sensor detection signal - 2 SG Signal ground - 23 /DIOW I/O write signal - 23 D06 I/F data bus [6] - 23 AG Analog ground - 23 +5.1VB +5V -
A10 SG Signal ground - 3 KCTRC-0 Key copy counter/Copy key card connection detection signal L 24 SG Signal ground - 24 A15 I/F address bus [15] - 24 +12VB +12V - 24 AG Anlog ground -
A11 +24VD2 +24V - 4 +24VD2 +24V - 25 /DIOR I/O read signal - 25 D05 I/F data bus [5] - 25 +12VB +12V - 25 +5VA +5V -
A12 FUSFN-0A Fuser unit cooling fan motor drive signal - 5 KCTR0-0 Key copy counter ON signal - 26 SG Signal ground - 26 A14 I/F address bus [14] - 26 +12VB +12V - 26 -12VB -12V -
A13 +24VD2 +24V - 6 NC Not connected - 27 IORDY I/O ready signal - 27 D04 I/F data bus [4] - 27 AG Analog ground -
A14 +24VD2 +24V - 28 SG Signal ground - 28 A13 I/F address bus [13] - CN2 PWA-F-SLG (CN2) <-> PLTN-SNR, HOME-SNR 28 +12VB +12V -
A15 EXTMA-0A Exit motor drive signal-A - CN316 PWA-F-LGC (CN316) <-> PS-IH 29 /DMACK DMA acknowledge signal L 29 D03 I/F data bus [3] - Pin No Symbol Name Active 29 +24VB +24V -
A16 EXTMB-0A Exit motor drive signal-B - Pin No Symbol Name Active 30 SG Signal ground - 30 A12 I/F address bus [12] - 1 SG Signal ground - 30 PG Power ground -
A17 EXTMC-0A Exit motor drive signal-C - A1 IH2ON-0A IH2 ON/OFF signal H 31 INTRQ Interrupt request signal H 31 D02 I/F data bus [2] - 2 PLTN-1A Platen sensor detection signal -
A18 EXTMD-0A Exit motor drive signal-D - A2 +5V SW +5V -
32
NC(RESERV
Reserve signal -
32 A11 I/F address bus [11] - 3 +5V +5V - CN502 FAX (CN502) <-> NCU (2) (OPTION)
A19 +5VSW +5V - A3 H1PWR1-0 Heater H1 power data-1 - ED) 33 D01 I/F data bus [1] - 4 SG Signal ground - Pin No Symbol Name Active
B1 RLC2S-0 Not used - A4 H1PWR2-0 Heater H1 power data-2 - 33 DA1 Device address [1] - 34 A10 I/F address bus [10] - 5 HOME-1A Carriage home position sensor detection signal - 1 TXB Transmitted FAX data -
B2 +5.1VB +5V - A5 H1PWR3-0 Heater H1 power data-3 - 34 /PDIAG Passed diagnostics L 35 D00 I/F data bus [0] - 6 +5V +5V - 2 RXIN Received FAX data -
Job separator: lower stack sensor detection signal A6 NC Not connected - 35 DA0 Device address [0] - 36 A09 I/F address bus [9] - 3 CML CML relay drive signal -
B3 RLHSW-0 - A7 NC Not connected - 37 A04 I/F address bus [4] -
Offset tray: stack sensor detection signal 36 DA2 Device address [2] - CN7 PWA-F-SLG (CN7) <-> RADF (CN2) (OPTION) 4 LD Dial pulse drive signal -
Job separator: paper jam sensor detection signal A8 NC Not connected - 37 /CS0 Chip select-0 L 38 A08 I/F address bus [8] - 5 ER/HK Not used -
B4 RLTRS-0 - A9 NC Not connected - 39 /RESET System reset signal - Pin No Symbol Name Active
Offset tray: paper feed sensor detection signal 38 /CS1 Chip select-1 L 6 ATT3DB -3 db ATT exchange signal -
B1 NC Not connected - 40 A07 I/F address bus [7] - 1 DFAK RADF acknowledge signal -
B5 JSPSW-0 Job separator/offset tray connection detection signal L 39 /DASP Device active or slave present signal L 7 RLADJ1 Modem select signal -
B2 H2PWR1-0 Heater H2 power data-1 - 41 /ACK NIC Acknowledge signal - 2 DFSCST VARID signal from RADF -
B6 RLCNT-0 Not used - 40 SG Signal ground - 8 RLADJ2 Modem select signal -
B3 H2PWR2-0 Heater H2 power data-2 - 42 A06 I/F address bus [6] - 3 DFRXD Received serial data -
L: Offset tray 4 SG Signal ground - 9 RGCLK Not used
B7 OPCHK1 Job separator/offset tray judgment signal B4 H2PWR3-0 Heater H2 power data-3 - CN113 PWA-F-SYS (CN113) <-> HDD (CN171) 43 /CSP1 Chip select signal - 10 AG Signal ground -
H: Job separator 5 DFTXD RADF transmitted serial data -
B5 IH1ON-0A IH1 ON/OFF signal H 44 A05 I/F address bus [5] -
B8 RLCSW-0 Job separator/offset tray cover switch detection signal L Pin No Symbol Name Active 6 SG Signal ground - 11 -12VB -12V -
B6 SG Signal ground - 45 NC (OEO) Not connected - 12 AG Analog ground -
B9 SG Signal ground - 1 +12VA +12V - 7 DFRAK Acknowledge signal from RADF -
B7 IH DUTY IH1/2 duty control signal - 46 NC (STXD) Not connected - 13 +12VB +12V -
Job separator: upper stack sensor detection signal 2 SG Signal ground - 8 DFRRQ Request signal from RADF -
B10 JFSL2ON - B8 H1 ERR1-0 Heater H1 error signal-1 - 47 RW Read/write to NIC - 14 NC Not connected -
Offset tray: separation sensor detection signal 3 SG Signal ground - 9 DFRQ RADF request signal -
B9 H1 ERR2-0 Heater H1 error signal-2 - 48 SG Signal ground - 15 16Hz Not used -
B11 GASOL-0A Solenoid driving signal - 4 +5.1VA +5V - 10 DFCNT RADF connection detection signal -
49 A16 I/F address bus [16] - 16 AG Analog ground -
B12 +24VD2 +24V -
CN317 PWA-F-LGC (CN317) <-> ATTNR-SNR, THMS-DRM, USD-TNR- CN116 PWA-F-SYS (CN116) <-> DIMM (0)
50 SG Signal ground - 17 CI Ring signal detect L
B13 PG Power ground - 51 +3.3VA +3.3V - CN9 PWA-F-SLG (CN9) <-> INV-EXP (CN1)
B14 OFFSET2 OCT motor drive signal-2 - FLL-SNR2, MID-FAN-MOT, EXIT-FAN-MOT, SP-FAN-MOT, LP- Pin No Symbol Name Active 52 SG Signal ground - Pin No Symbol Name Active
18 ANSDET Facsimile data answer detection L
19 REVA Line 2 External telephone hook detection signal -
B15 OFFSET1 OCT motor drive signal-1 - ERS, FRNT-COV-SW, MAIN-SW, TEMP/HUMI-SNR 1 SG Signal ground - 53 NC (DACK) Not connected - 1 PG Power ground - 20 REVB Line 2 External telephone hook detection signal -
B16 +24VD2 +24V - Pin No Symbol Name Active 2 DQ0 Memory data bus [0] - 54 +3.3VA +3.3V - 2 PG Power ground -
B17 IHFN-0A IH board cooling fan motor drive signal - 21 NC Not connected -
A1 ATSSW-0 Auto toner sensor connection detection signal L 3 DQ1 Memory data bus [1] - 55 /INTPR2 PR2 interrupt signal - 3 LMPON-A Exposure lamp ON signal H
L: e-STUDIO350 22 NC Not connected -
A2 ATSVR-1A Black auto-toner sensor reference voltage Analog 4 DQ2 Memory data bus [2] - 56 SG Signal ground - 4 +24VD4 +24V -
B18 CPSW2-0 e-STUDIO350/450 judgment signal 23 +5VA +5V -
H: e-STUDIO450 A3 +24VD2 +24V - 5 DQ3 Memory data bus [3] - 57 BRDNIN NIC board in detection signal - 5 +24VD4 +24V - 24 AG Analog ground -
B19 SG Signal ground - A4 ATS-1A Black auto-toner sensor detection signal Analog 6 +3.3VA +3.3V - 58 +3.3VA +3.3V - 25 +5VA +5V -
A5 SG Signal ground - 7 DQ4 Memory data bus [4] - 59 +3.3VA +3.3V - CN10 PWA-F-SLG (CN10) <-> APS1 (A4 SERIES ONLY), APS2, APS3, 26 -12VB -12V -
CN303 PWA-F-LGC (CN303) <-> PFP (OPTION)/LCF (OPTION) A6 SG Signal ground - 8 DQ5 Memory data bus [5] - 60 +3.3VA +3.3V -
9 DQ6 Memory data bus [6] - APS4, APS5 27 AG Analog ground -
Pin No Symbol Name Active A7 DRTH-0A Drum thermistor detection signal Analog 28 +12VB +12V -
10 DQ7 Memory data bus [7] - Pin No Symbol Name Active
A1 CLKC-1A PFP/LCF output select signal - A8 SG Signal ground - CN124 PWA-F-SYS (CN124) <-> PCI (CN150)/SCRAMBLER BOARD 1 NC Not connected - 29 NC Not connected -
A9 FRDSW-0 Front cover opening/closing switch signal - 11 DQ8 Memory data bus [8] -
A2 CLKB-1A PFP/LCF output select signal -
12 SG Signal ground - (OPTION) 2 +24VD4 +24V(Reserved) - 30 NC Not connected -
A3 SCSWC-0A PFP/LCF input select signal - A10 SG Signal ground -
13 DQ9 Memory data bus [9] - Pin No Symbol Name Active 3 FANSLG Not connected -
A11 RSTSW-0A Reset signal from the main switch L
A4 DRV7-1A PFP/LCF driver control signal -
14 DQ10 Memory data bus [10] - 1 +3.3VA +3.3V - 4 +5VAPS +5V - CN503 FAX (CN503) <-> SPEAKER (OPTION)
A5 DRV6-1A PFP/LCF driver control signal - A12 +24VD2 +24V -
15 DQ11 Memory data bus [11] - 2 +3.3VA +3.3V - 5 APSR-0A Automatic original detection sensor signal - Pin No Symbol Name -
A6 DRV5-1A PFP/LCF driver control signal - A13 SG Signal ground -
16 DQ12 Memory data bus [12] - 3 +3.3VA +3.3V - 6 SG Signal ground - 1 SP+ Speaker output (+) -
A7 DRV4-1A PFP/LCF driver control signal - A14 TBNFL-1 Toner bag full detection sensor-2 signal -
17 DQ13 Memory data bus [13] - 4 SG Signal ground - 7 +5VAPS +5V - 2 SP- Speaker output (-) -
A8 DRV3-1A PFP/LCF driver control signal - A15 +5.1VB +5V -
B1 +24VD2 +24V - 18 +3.3VA +3.3V - 5 -12VA -12V - 8 APSC-0A Automatic original detection sensor signal -
A9 DRV2-1A PFP/LCF driver control signal -
A10 DRV1-1A PFP/LCF driver control signal - B2 ERSLP-0A Exposure lamp drive signal - 19 DQ14 Memory data bus [14] - 6 -12VA -12V - 9 SG Signal ground - CN600 FAX (CN600) <-> MDM (CN401) (OPTION)
B3 +24VD2 +24V - 20 DQ15 Memory data bus [15] - 7 +5.1VA +5V - 10 +5VAPS +5V - Pin No Symbol Name Active
A11 DRV0-1A PFP/LCF driver control signal -
B4 MIIDFN-0A Middle fan motor drive signal - 21 NC Not connected - 8 +5.1VA +5V - 11 APS3-0A Automatic original detection sensor signal - 1 TXOUT2 Transmitted data -
A12 PFRST-0 Reset signal -
B5 +24VD2 +24V - 22 NC Not connected - 9 +3.3VA +3.3V - 12 SG Signal ground - 2 +5VA +5V -
A13 +5.1VB +5V -
B6 EXTFN-0A Exhaust fan motor drive signal - 23 SG Signal ground - 10 OPBINT(2) Interrupt request-2 - 13 +5VAPS +5V - 3 +12VB +12V -
A14 SG Signal ground -
B7 +24VD2 +24V - 24 NC Not connected - 11 OPBINT(0) Interrupt request-0 - 14 APS2-0A Automatic original detection sensor signal - 4 +3.3VB +3.3V -
A15 +24VD1 +24V -
B8 SPFN0A Sub-separation fan motor drive signal - 25 NC Not connected - 12 SG Signal ground - 15 SG Signal ground - 5 MOD2DMA-1 Modem 2 DMA signal -
A16 +24VD1 +24V -
B9 NC Not connected - 26 +3.3VA +3.3V - 13 PCICLK(5) PCI clock-5 (Not used) - 16 +5VAPS +5V - 6 SG Signal ground -
B1 PG Power ground -
B10 NC Not connected - 27 /WE Data write enable signal - 14 SG Signal ground - 17 APS1-0A Automatic original detection sensor signal - 7 MEM2CS-0 SRAM chip select signal -
B2 PG Power ground -
B11 +5.1VB +5V - 28 DQMB0 Output disable/write mask-0 - 15 PCICLK(3) PCI clock-3 - 18 SG Signal ground - 8 +5.1VB +5V -
B3 SIZE0-0A Size data bus-0 -
B12 HMS-1A Humidity sensor signal Analog 29 DQMB1 Output disable/write mask-1 - 16 SG Signal ground - 9 MEMRD2-0 SRAM data read signal -
B4 SIZE1-0A Size data bus-1 -
B5 SIZE2-0A Size data bus-2 - B13 SG Signal ground - 30 /CS0 Chip select signal-0 - 17 REQ(1)# Data request signal-1 - CN19 PWA-F-SLG (CN19) <-> SCAN-MOT 10 CLKOE-1 Clock out enable signal -
B14 TEMP-1 Temperature sensor signal Analog 31 NC Not connected - 18 REQ(0)# Data request signal-0 - Pin No Symbol Name Active 11 TXEN2-1 TX enable signal -
B6 SIZE3-0A Size data bus-3 -
B15 NC Not connected - 32 SG Signal ground - 19 +3.3VA +3.3V - 1 SCNM-BB Scan motor drive signal-B - 12 +5.1VB +5V -
B7 RETS0-0A PFP/LCF sensor detection signal -
33 A0 Memory address bus [0] - 20 AD[31] PCI address/data bus [31] - 2 +24VD4 +24V - 13 A[16] MDM address bus [16] -
B8 RETS1-0A PFP/LCF sensor detection signal -
34 A2 Memory address bus [1] - 21 AD[29] PCI address/data bus [29] -
B9 RETS2-0A PFP/LCF sensor detection signal - CN318 PWA-F-LGC (CN318) <-> MAIN-MOT, DEV-FAN-MOT1, DEV-CLT, 35 A4 Memory address bus [2] - 22 SG Signal ground -
3 SCNM-B Scan motor drive signal-B - 14 A[14] MDM address bus [14] -
B10 RETS3-0A PFP/LCF sensor detection signal - 4 SCNM-AB Scan motor drive signal-A - 15 A[12] MDM address bus [12] -
B11 RETS4-0A PFP/LCF sensor detection signal -
TNR-MOT, RGT-CLT, RGST-SNR, FED-U-SNR, FED-L-SNR, SIDE- 36 A6 Memory address bus [3] - 23 AD[27] PCI address/data bus [27] - 5 +24VD4 +24V - 16 A[10] MDM address bus [10] -
B12 RETS5-0A PFP/LCF sensor detection signal - COV-SW, TNR-SW, USD-TNR-FLL-SNR1 37 A8 Memory address bus [4] - 24 AD[25] PCI address/data bus [25] - 6 SCNM-A Scan motor drive signal-A - 17 A[8] MDM address bus [8] -
38 A10 Memory address bus [10] - 25 +3.3VA +3.3V -
B13 RETS6-0A PFP/LCF sensor detection signal - Pin No Symbol Name Active 18 A[6] MDM address bus [6] -
39 BA1 Bank select-1 - 26 C/BE(3]# Command and byte enable-3 -
B14 RETS7-0A PFP/LCF sensor detection signal - A1 MAMPL-1 Main motor PLL signal L: Normal
40 +3.3VA +3.3V - 27 AD[23] PCI address/data bus [23] - CN22 PWA-F-SLG (CN22) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (SLG) 19 A[4] MDM address bus [4] -
B15 SCSWB-0A PFP/LCF input select signal - L: Braking Pin No Symbol Name Active 20 A[2] MDM address bus [2] -
A2 MAMBK-0A Main motor brake signal 41 +3.3VA +3.3V - 28 SG Signal ground - 21 A[0] MDM address bus [0] -
B16 LCCNT-0 LCF connection signal L H: Normal 1 MDT[0] ROM data bus [0] -
42 CLK0 Clock-0 input - 29 AD[21] PCI address/data bus [21] - 22 +5.1VB +5V -
L: CW 30 AD[19] PCI address/data bus [19] - 2 MDT[2] ROM data bus [2] -
A3 MAMCW-0A Main motor rotational direction signal 43 SG Signal ground - 23 CEP1RST-0 CEP1 reset signal -
CN304 PWA-F-LGC (CN304) <-> PWA-F-ADU (CN211, 212), ADU-CLT, PWA- H: CCW 44 NC Not connected - 31 +3.3VA +3.3V - 3 MDT[4] ROM data bus [4] -
24 5.1VB +5V -
F-SFB (J619), SFB-SNR, SFB-FEED-CLT, SFB-SOL, SFB-FED-SER A4 MAMON-0A Main motor ON/OFF signal
L: ON 45 /CS2 Chip select signal-2 - 32 AD[17] PCI address/data bus [17] - 4 MDT[6] ROM data bus [6] -
25 SG Signal ground -
H: OFF 5 MRD ROM data read signal -
Pin No Symbol Name Active 46 DQMB2 Output disable/write mask-2 - 33 C/BE(2)# Command and byte enable-2 - 26 CEPCLK System clock signal -
A5 SG Signal ground - 47 DQMB3 Output disable/write mask-3 - 34 SG Signal ground - (PNCNT)DLA
A1 PG Power ground - 6 D/L address bus [0] - 27 SG Signal ground -
A2 PG Power ground - A6 +5.1VB +5V - 48 NC Not connected - 35 IRDY# Initiator ready L D[0] 28 D[0] MDM data bus [0] -
A3 +24VD1 +24V - A7 MAMCK-1A Main motor reference clock signal - 49 +3.3VA +3.3V - 36 +3.3VA +3.3V - (SSW)DLAD
7 D/L address bus [2] - 29 D[2] MDM data bus [2] -
A4 +24VD1 +24V - A8 +24VD2 +24V - 50 NC Not connected - 37 DEVSEL# Device select L [2] 30 D[4] MDM data bus [4] -
A5 ADM2D-0A ADU motor drive signal-D - A9 DEVFN-0A Developer unit cooling fan-1 motor drive signal - 51 NC Not connected - 38 SG Signal ground - 8 MAD[4] ROM address bus [4] - 31 D[6] MDM data bus [6] -
A6 ADM2B-0A ADU motor drive signal-B - A10 +24VD2 +24V - 52 NC Not connected - 39 LOCK# Lock L 9 MAD[6] ROM address bus [6] - 32 D[8] MDM data bus [8] -
A7 ADM2C-0A ADU motor drive signal-C - A11 DEVCL-OA Developer drive clutch drive signal - 53 NC Not connected - 40 PERR# Data parity Error L 10 MAD[8] ROM address bus [8] - 33 D[10] MDM data bus [10] -
A8 ADM2A-0A ADU motor drive signal-A - A12 TNRMT-0A Toner motor drive signal - 54 SG Signal ground - 41 +3.3VA +3.3V - 11 MAD[10] ROM address bus [10] - 34 D[12] MDM data bus [12] -
A9 CRT-DOWN ADU motor control signal - A13 TNRMT-1A Toner motor drive signal - 55 DQ16 Memory data bus [16] - 42 SERR# System Error L 12 MAD[12] ROM address bus [12] - 35 D[14] MDM data bus [14] -
A10 ADTR2-1 ADU exit sensor detection signal L A14 +24VD2 +24V - 56 DQ17 Memory data bus [17] - 43 +3.3VA +3.3V - 13 MAD[14] ROM address bus [14] - 36 SG Signal ground -
A11 +5.1VB +5V - A15 RGTCL-0A Registration clutch drive signal - 57 DQ18 Memory data bus [18] - 44 C/BE(1)# Command and byte enable-1 - 14 MAD[16] ROM address bus [16] - 37 MOD2DET-0 Modem 2 detection signal -
A12 SG Signal ground - A16 NC Not connected - 58 DQ19 Memory data bus [19] - 45 AD[14] PCI address/data bus [14] - 15 MAD[18] ROM address bus [18] - 38 SG Signal ground -
A13 ADCNT-1 ADU connection detection signal L A17 NC Not connected - 59 +3.3VA +3.3V - 46 SG Signal ground - 16 SG Signal ground - 39 DREQC2-1 Data request signal -
A14 ADTR1-1 ADU entrance sensor detection signal L B1 SG Signal ground - 60 DQ20 Memory data bus [20] - 47 AD[12] PCI address/data bus [12] - 17 SG Signal ground - 40 DACKC2-0 Data acknowledge signal -
A15 ADCOV-1 ADU opening/closing switch detection signal L B2 PSTPC-1 Registration sensor detection signal - 61 NC Not connected - 48 AD[10] PCI address/data bus [10] - 18 MDT[1] ROM data bus [1] - 41 RXIN2 Received data -
A16 +24VD1 +24V - B3 +5.1VB +5V - 62 NC Not connected - 49 M66EN PCI bus 66 MHz clock enable signal - 19 MDT[3] ROM data bus [3] - 42 AG Analog ground -
A17 ADUCL-0 ADU clutch drive signal L B4 SG Signal ground - 63 CKE1 Clock enable signal - 50 SG Signal ground - 20 MDT[5] ROM data bus [5] - 43 -12VB -12V -
A18 NC Not connected - B5 CUFED-1 Upper drawer feed sensor detection signal - 64 SG Signal ground - 51 AD[8] PCI address/data bus [8] - 21 MDT[7] ROM data bus [7] - 44 AG Analog ground -
B1 SG Signal ground - B6 +5.1VB +5V - 65 DQ21 Memory data bus [21] - 52 AD[7] PCI address/data bus [7] - 22 CS02-0 Chip select signal - 45 MOD2INT-1 Modem 2 interrupt signal -
B2 SG Signal ground - B7 SG Signal ground - 66 DQ22 Memory data bus [22] - 53 +3.3VA +3.3V - (PNCNT)DLA 46 MOD2CS-0 Modem 2 chip select signal -
B8 CLFED-1 Lower drawer feed sensor detection signal - 54 AD[5] PCI address/data bus [5] - 23 D/L address bus [1] -
B3 SFBZ0 SFB paper size detection signal-0 - 67 DQ23 Memory data bus [23] - D[1] 47 MOD2RST-0 Modem 2 reset signal -
B4 SFBZ1 SFB paper size detection signal-1 - B9 +5.1VB +5V - 68 SG Signal ground - 55 AD[3] PCI address/data bus [3] - (MER)DLAD 48 SG Signal ground -
B5 SFBZ2 SFB paper size detection signal-2 - B10 SDCSW-1 Side cover opening/closing switch signal - 69 DQ24 Memory data bus [24] - 56 SG Signal ground - 24 D/L address bus [3] -
[3] 49 RXEN2-1 RX enable signal -
B6 SFBZ3 SFB paper size detection signal-3 - B11 SG Signal ground - 70 DQ25 Memory data bus [25] - 57 AD[1] PCI address/data bus [1] - 25 MAD[5] ROM address bus [5] - 50 MEMWRH2-0 SRAM high byte write signal -
B7 +5.1VB +5V - B12 SG Signal ground - 71 DQ26 Memory data bus [26] - 58 +3.3VA +3.3V - 26 MAD[7] ROM address bus [7] - 51 MEMWRL2-0 SRAM low byte write signal -
B8 SFBSW-1 SFB bypass paper sensor detection signal - B13 BTLSW-1 Toner cartridge switch signal - 72 DQ27 Memory data bus [27] - 59 +5.1VA +5V - 27 MAD[9] ROM address bus [9] - 52 A[18] MDM address bus [18] -
B9 SG Signal ground - B14 SG Signal ground - 73 +3.3VA +3.3V - 60 SG Signal ground - 28 MAD[11] ROM address bus [11] - 53 A[17] MDM address bus [17] -
B10 +24VD1 +24V - B15 TBFL-1 Toner bag full detection sensor-1 signal - 74 DQ28 Memory data bus [28] - 61 +3.3VA +3.3V - 29 MAD[13] ROM address bus [13] - 54 A[15] MDM address bus [15] -
B11 FFBCL-0A Bypass feed clutch drive signal L B16 +5.1VB +5V - 75 DQ29 Memory data bus [29] - 62 +3.3VA +3.3V - 30 MAD[15] ROM address bus [15] - 55 A[13] MDM address bus [13] -
B12 +24VD1 +24V - B17 NC Not connected - 76 DQ30 Memory data bus [30] - 63 +3.3VA +3.3V - 31 MAD[17] ROM address bus [17] - 56 A[11] MDM address bus [11] -
B13 SOLSFB-0A Bypass pickup solenoid drive signal - 77 DQ31 Memory data bus [31] - 64 SG Signal ground - 32 ROMDT-0 ROM select signal - 57 A[9] MDM address bus [9] -
B14 SG Signal ground - CN320 PWA-F-LGC (CN320) <-> DEV-FAN-MOT2 78 SG Signal ground - 65 +12VA +12V - 33 +5.1VB +5V - 58 A[7] MDM address bus [7] -
B15 SFDFED-1 Bypass feed sensor detection signal - Pin No Symbol Name Active 79 CLK2 Clock-2 input - 66 +12VA +12V - 34 LED LED drive signal - 59 A[5] MDM address bus [5] -
B16 +5.1VB +5V - 1 +24VD2 +24V - 80 NC Not connected - 67 +5.1VA +5V - 60 A[3] MDM address bus [3] -
B17 SFBSW SFB connection detection signal L 81 NC(WP) Not connected - 68 +5.1VA +5V -
2 DV2FN-0A Developer unit cooling fan-2 motor drive signal -
69 +3.3VA +3.3V - CN2 INV-EXP (CN2) <-> LP-EXPO 61 A[1] MDM address bus [1] -
B18 NC Not connected - 82 SDA PD serial data - 62 CPURST-0 CPU reset signal -
70 OPBINT(1) Interrupt request-1 - Pin No Symbol Name Active
CN100 PWA-F-SYS (CN100) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (SYS) 83 SCL PD serial clock - 63 CEP2INT-1 CEP2 interrupt signal -
71 +3.3VA +3.3V - 1 - Exposure lamp high-voltage output -
CN305 PWA-F-LGC (CN305) <-> EMP-U-SNR, CST-U-TRY-SNR, CST-U- Pin No Symbol Name Active
84 +3.3VA +3.3V -
2 NC Not connected - 64 5.1VB +5V -
85 SG Signal ground - 72 PCIRST# PCI reset signal - 65 5.1VB +5V -
FEED-CLT, NEMP-U-SNR, EMP-L-SNR, CST-L-TRY-SNR, CST-L- 1 DATA0 System data bus [0] -
86 DQ32 Memory data bus [32] - 73 +3.3VA +3.3V - 3 NC Not connected -
66 IORD2-0 MDM data read signal -
2 DATA2 System data bus [2] - 4 - Exposure lamp high-voltage output -
FEED-CLT, NEMP-L-SNR 3 DATA4 System data bus [4] -
87 DQ33 Memory data bus [33] - 74 PCICLK(4) PCI clock-4 - 67 IOWR2-0 MDM data write signal -
Pin No Symbol Name Active 88 DQ34 Memory data bus [34] - 75 +3.3VA +3.3V - 68 D[1] MDM data bus [1] -
A1 SG Signal ground -
4 DATA6 System data bus [6] -
89 DQ35 Memory data bus [35] - 76 GNT(1)# Grant-1 - J422 PWA-F-DSP (J422) <-> LCD PANEL 69 D[3] MDM data bus [3] -
5 DATA8 System data bus [8] - 77 GNT(0)# Grant-0 - Pin No Symbol Name Active
A2 CUEMP-1 Upper drawer empty sensor detection signal - 90 +3.3VA +3.3V - 70 D[5] MDM data bus [5] -
6 DATA10 System data bus [10] - 78 SG Signal ground - 1 YD Y-axis touch position detection terminal (D) -
A3 +5.1VB +5V - 91 DQ36 Memory data bus [36] - 71 D[7] MDM data bus [7] -
7 DATA12 System data bus [12] - 79 PME# Power Management Event - 2 KL X-axis touch position detection terminal (L) -
A4 SG Signal ground - 92 DQ37 Memory data bus [37] - 72 D[9] MDM data bus [9] -
8 DATA14 System data bus [14] - 80 AD[30] PCI address/data bus [30] - 3 XR X-axis touch position detection terminal (R) -
A5 CUTOP-1 Upper drawer tray-up sensor detection signal - 93 DQ38 Memory data bus [38] - 73 D[11] MDM data bus [11] -
9 A21 System address bus [19] - 81 +3.3VA +3.3V - 4 YU Y-axis touch position detection terminal (U) -
A6 +5.1VB +5V - 94 DQ39 Memory data bus [39] - 74 D[13] MDM data bus [13] -
10 A19 System address bus [17] - 82 AD[28] PCI address/data bus [28] -
A7 CURGC-0A Upper drawer feed clutch drive signal - 95 DQ40 Memory data bus [40] - 75 D[15] MDM data bus [15] -
11 A17 System address bus [15] -
A8 +24VD1 +24V - 12 A15 System address bus [13] -
96 SG Signal ground - 83 AD[26] PCI address/data bus [26] - J423 PWA-F-DSP (J423) <-> LCD BACK LIGHT 76 5.1VB +5V -
A9 SG Signal ground - 97 DQ41 Memory data bus [41] - 84 SG Signal ground - Pin No Symbol Name Active 77 5.1VB +5V -
13 A13 System address bus [11] - 85 AD[24] PCI address/data bus [24] -
A10 CUFLS-1 Upper drawer paper stock sensor detection signal - 98 DQ42 Memory data bus [42] - 1 CCFL+ High-voltage terminal (High) - 78 CEP2CS-0 CEP2 chip select signal -
14 A11 System address bus [9] - 86 +3.3VA +3.3V -
A11 +5.1VB +5V - 99 DQ43 Memory data bus [43] - 2 NC Not connected - 79 DREQD2-1 Data request signal -
15 A09 System address bus [7] - 87 +3.3VA +3.3V -
B1 SG Signal ground - 100 DQ44 Memory data bus [44] - 3 CCFL- high-voltage terminal (Low) - 80 DACKD2-0 Data acknowledge signal
16 A07 System address bus [5] - 88 AD[22] PCI address/data bus [22] -
B2 CLEMP-1 Lower drawer empty sensor detection signal - 101 DQ45 Memory data bus [45] -
17 A05 System address bus [3] - 89 AD[20] PCI address/data bus [20] -
102 +3.3VA +3.3V - CN602 FAX (CN602) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (FAX) (OPTION)
B3 +5.1VB +5V - 18 A03 System address bus [1] -
103 DQ46 Memory data bus [46] - 90 SG Ground - J424 PWA-F-DSP (J424) <-> LCD PANEL
B4 SG Signal ground - Pin No Symbol Name Active
19 RDX System read signal -
104 DQ47 Memory data bus [47] - 91 AD[18] PCI address/data bus [18] - Pin No Symbol Name Active
B5 CLTOP-1 Lower drawer tray-up sensor detection signal - 20 CS7-A Chip select signal (7-A) - 1 D[0] ROM data bus [0] -
105 NC Not connected - 92 AD[16] PCI address/data bus [16] - 1 FRAME LCD scanning line start signal -
B6 +5.1VB +5V - 21 CS7-B Chip select signal (7-B) - 2 D[2] ROM data bus [2] -
106 NC Not connected - 93 +3.3VA +3.3V - 2 LAOD LCD data latch pulse -
B7 CLRGC-0 Lower drawer feed clutch drive signal - 22 +3.3VA +3.3V - 3 D[4] ROM data bus [4] -
107 SG Signal ground - 94 FRAME# Cycle frame L 3 CP LCD data transmission clock -
B8 +24VD1 +24V - 23 +3.3VA +3.3V - 4 D[6] ROM data bus [6] -
108 NC Not connected - 95 SG Signal ground - 4 SG Ground -
B9 SG Signal ground - 24 SG Signal ground - 5 RD-0 ROM data read signal -
109 NC Not connected - 96 TRDY# Target ready L 5 +5.1VA +5V -
B10 CLFLS-0 Upper drawer paper stock sensor detection signal - 25 SG Signal ground - 6 A[0] ROM address bus [0] -
110 +3.3VA +3.3V - 97 SG Signal ground - 6 SG Signal ground -
B11 +5.1VB +5V - 26 DATA1 System data bus [1] - 7 A[2] ROM address bus [2] -
111 /CAS Column address strobe signal - 98 STOP# Stop L 7 VEE Ground -
27 DATA3 System data bus [3] - 99 +3.3VA +3.3V - 8 /D.OFF LCD enable signal - 8 A[4] ROM address bus [4] -
CN306 PWA-F-LGC (CN306) <-> PS-HVT (CN551), TRY-MOT, CST-TR-L- 28 DATA5 System data bus [5] -
112 DQMB4 Output disable/write mask-4 -
100 +3.3VA +3.3V - 9 D0 LCD display data-0 - 9 A[6] ROM address bus [6] -
113 DQMB5 Output disable/write mask-5 -
CLT, CST-TR-LCLT, CST-TR-H-CLT, CST-U-SW, CST-L-SW 29 DATA7 System data bus [7] -
114 /CS1 Chip select signal-1 - 101 SG Signal ground - 10 D1 LCD display data-1 - 10 A[8] ROM address bus [8] -
Pin No Symbol Name Active 30 DATA9 System data bus [9] - 102 SG Signal ground - 11 D2 LCD display data-2 - 11 A[10] ROM address bus [10] -
115 /RAS Row address strobe signal -
A1 NC Not connected - 31 DATA11 System data bus [11] - 103 PAR Parity - 12 D3 LCD display data-3 - 12 A[12] ROM address bus [12] -
116 SG Signal ground -
A2 NC Not connected - 32 DATA13 System data bus [13] - 104 AD[15] PCI address/data bus [15] - 13 A[14] ROM address bus [14] -
117 A1 Memory address bus [1] -
A3 CLTRM-0A Tray-up motor drive signal + - 33 DATA15 System data bus [15] -
118 A3 Memory address bus [3] - 105 +3.3VA +3.3V - J425 PWA-F-DSP (J425) <-> PWA-F-KEY (J428) 14 A[16] ROM address bus [16] -
A4 CLTRM-1A Tray-up motor drive signal - - 34 A20 System address bus [18] - 106 AD[13] PCI address/data bus [13] - Pin No Symbol Name Active 15 A[18] ROM address bus [18] -
119 A5 Memory address bus [5] -
A5 CUTRC-0B Transport clutch (low speed) drive signal - 35 A18 System address bus [16] - 107 AD[11] PCI address/data bus [11] - 16 SG Signal ground -
120 A7 Memory address bus [7] - 1 LDFC-1 LED driver output (1) L
A6 +24VD1 +24V - 36 A16 System address bus [14] - 108 SG Signal ground - 17 SG Signal ground -
121 A9 Memory address bus [9] - 2 LDFC-2 LED driver output (2) L
A7 CFEDC-0A Transport clutch (high speed) drive signal - 37 A14 System address bus [12] - 109 AD[9] PCI address/data bus [9] - 18 D[1] ROM data bus [1] -
122 A11 Memory address bus [11] - 3 LDFC-4 LED driver output (4) L
A8 +24VD1 +24V - 38 A12 System address bus [10] - 110 SG Signal ground - 19 D[3] ROM data bus [3] -
123 BA0 Bank select-0 - 4 LDFC-5 LED driver output (5) L
A9 SG Signal ground - 39 A10 System address bus [8] - 111 C/BE(0)# Command and byte enable-0 - 20 D[5] ROM data bus [5] -
124 +3.3VA +3.3V - 5 LDFC-6 LED driver output (6) L
A10 CUSW-0 Upper drawer detection switch signal - 40 A08 System address bus [6] - 112 +3.3VA +3.3V - 21 D[7] ROM data bus [7] -
125 NC(CLK1) Not connected (Clock-1 input) - 6 LDFC-7 LED driver output (7) L
A11 SG Signal ground - 41 A06 System address bus [4] - 113 AD[6] PCI address/data bus [6] - 22 BOOTCS-0 Chip select signal -
126 A12 Memory address bus [12] - 7 LDFC-8 LED driver output (8) L
A12 CLSW-0 Lower drawer detection switch signal - 42 A04 System address bus [2] - 114 AD[4] PCI address/data bus [4] - 23 A[1] ROM address bus [1] -
127 SG Signal ground - 8 LDFC-9 LED driver output (9) L
A13 NC Not connected - 43 A02 System address bus [0] - 115 SG Signal ground - 24 A[3] ROM address bus [3] -
128 CKE Clock enable signal - 9 LDFC-10 LED driver output (10) L
B1 NC Not connected - 44 DWNLED System address bus [20] - 116 AD[2] PCI address/data bus [2] - 25 A[5] ROM address bus [5] -
129 /CS3 Chip select signal-3 - 10 LDFC-11 LED driver output (11) L
B2 +24VD1 +24V - 45 /CS0 System chip select signal-0 - 117 AD[0] PCI address/data bus [0] - 26 A[7] ROM address bus [7] -
130 DQMB6 Output disable/write mask-6 - 11 LDFC-12 LED driver output (12) L
B3 PG Power ground - 46 +3.3VB +3.3V - 118 +3.3VA +3.3V - 27 A[9] ROM address bus [9] -
131 DQMB7 Output disable/write mask-7 - 12 LDFC-13 LED driver output (13) L
B4 HVTM-0A Drum main charger grid voltage ON/OFF signal - 47 RMSL System control signal - 119 +5.1VA +5V - 28 A[11] ROM address bus [11] -
132 NC(A13) Not connected (Memory address bus [13]) - 13 LDFC-15 LED driver output (15) L
B5 HVMR-1A Drum main charger grid output reference voltage Analog 48 /WRX System write signal - 120 +5.1VA +5V - 29 A[13] ROM address bus [13] -
133 +3.3VA +3.3V - 14 LDON0 LED common driver signal (0) H
B6 HVTD-0A Developer bias high-voltage ON/OFF signal - 49 SG Signal ground - 30 A[15] ROM address bus [15] -
134 NC Not connected - 15 LDON1 LED common driver signal (1) H
50 SG Signal ground - 31 A[17] ROM address bus [17] -
B7 HVDVR-1A Developer bias high-voltage output reference voltage Analog 135 NC Not connected - CN126 PWA-F-SYS (CN126) <-> COIN CONTROLLER (OPTION)/COPY 16 SG Signal ground -
32 ROMDET0-0 Download board connection detection signal L
B8 HVTT-0A Transfer belt high-voltage ON/OFF signal - 136 NC Not connected -
CN101 PWA-F-SYS (CN101) <-> FAX BOARD (CN701) (OPTION) KEY CARD (OPTION) 33 5.1VB +5V -
B9 HVTVR-1A Transfer belt high-voltage output reference voltage Analog 137 NC Not connected -
Pin No Symbol Name Active J426 PWA-F-DSP (J426) <-> PWA-F-KEY (J429) 34 LEDDL-0 External ROM loading status signal L
B10 HVTGB-0A Transfer guide bias voltage ON/OFF signal - Pin No Symbol Name Active 138 SG Signal ground - Pin No Symbol Name Active
B11 HVTSP-0A Separation bias voltage ON/OFF signal - 1 +5.1VB +5V - 1 L/S Paper size signal -
139 DQ48 Memory data bus [48] - 1 SCN15 Button scanning signal (5) -
B12 HVSAV-1A Separation bias voltage output reference voltage Analog 2 DA1 IDE Address [1] - 140 DQ49 Memory data bus [49] -
2 FULL-C Full-color mode signal - J600 IPC (J600) <-> FINISHER (J599) (OPTION)
3 MONO-C Mono-color mode signal - 2 SCN14 Button scanning signal (4) -
B13 HVTSTS High-voltage power supply abnormality detection signal - 3 +5.1VB +5V - 141 DQ50 Memory data bus [50] - Pin No Symbol Name Active
4 B/W Black and white mode signal - 3 SCN13 Button scanning signal (3) -
4 DD0 FAX data bus [0] - 142 DQ51 Memory data bus [51] - 1 RXD Receiver serial data -
5 +5.1VA +5V - 4 SCN12 Button scanning signal (2) -
CN307 PWA-F-LGC (CN307) <-> PS-ACC (CN413, 414), LSU-FAN-MOT 5 +5.1VB +5V - 143 +3.3VA +3.3V -
6 SG Signal ground - 5 SCN11 Button scanning signal (1) -
2 SG Signal ground -
Pin No Symbol Name Active 6 DD3 FAX data bus [3] - 144 DQ52 Memory data bus [52] - 3 TXD Transmitted serial data -
7 NC Not connected - 6 RET0 Button scanning return signal (0) -
1 +3.3VB +3.3V - 7 +5.1VB +5V - 145 NC Not connected - 4 SG Signal ground -
7 RET1 Button scanning return signal (1) -
2 SG Signal ground - 8 DD6 FAX data bus [6] - 146 NC Not connected - 5 NC Not connected -
8 RET2 Button scanning return signal (2) -
3 +5.1VB +5V - 9 +5.1VB +5V - 147 NC Not connected - CN412 PS-ACC (CN412) <-> PWA-F-SYS (CN122) 6 NC Not connected -
9 RET3 Button scanning return signal (3) -
4 +5.1VB +5V - 10 DD9 FAX data bus [9] - 148 SG Signal ground - Pin No Symbol Name Active 7 NC Not connected -
10 RET8 Button scanning return signal (8) -
5 SG Signal ground - 11 SG Signal ground - 149 DQ53 Memory data bus [53] - 1 PWREN Power supply enable signal L 8 NC Not connected -
11 RET9 Button scanning return signal (9) -
6 SG Signal ground - 12 DD12 FAX data bus [12] - 150 DQ54 Memory data bus [54] - 2 PWRDN AC main power down signal L 9 F-CNT Finisher connection detection signal L
13 SG Signal ground - 151 DQ55 Memory data bus [55] - 3 -12VB -12V - 10 CNT-GND Ground -
7 +12VB +12V -
14 SG Signal ground - 152 SG Signal ground - 4 SG Signal ground - J2 PWA-F-NIC (J2) <-> LAN (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
8 SG Signal ground - Pin No Symbol Name Active
9 PDWN-1A AC main power down signal - 15 SG Signal ground - 153 DQ56 Memory data bus [56] - 5 +12VB +12V -
16 SG Signal ground - 154 DQ57 Memory data bus [57] - 6 SG Signal ground - 1 (TD+)FA1 Transmitted data + -
10 PWREN-0A Power supply enable signal L
17 SG Signal ground - 155 DQ58 Memory data bus [58] - 7 +12VA +12V - 2 (TD-)FA2 Transmitted data - -
11 +24VD1 +24V -
18 SG Signal ground - 156 DQ59 Memory data bus [59] - 8 SG Signal ground - 3 (RD+)FA3 Received data + -
12 +24VD1 +24V -
19 +3.3VB +3.3V - 157 +3.3VA +3.3V - 9 -12VA -12V - 4 FA45 Not used -
13 PG Power ground -
20 INTRQ IDE Interrupt request signal - 158 DQ60 Memory data bus [60] - 10 SG Signal ground - 5 FA45 Not used -
14 PG Power ground -
21 +3.3VB +3.3V - 159 DQ61 Memory data bus [61] - 11 SG Signal ground - 6 (RD-)FA6 Received data - -
15 +5.1VD +5V -
22 +5.1VA +5V - 160 DQ62 Memory data bus [62] - 12 SG Signal ground - 7 FA78 Not used -
16 SG Signal ground -
23 -12VB -12V - 161 DQ63 Memory data bus [63] - 13 +3.3VA +3.3V - 8 FA78 Not used -
17 +24VD1 +24V -
24 SG Signal ground - 162 SG Signal ground - 14 +3.3VA +3.3V - 9 NC(MTG) Not connected -
18 POLFN-0A Laser unit cooling fan motor drive signal -
25 +12VB +12V - 163 NC(CLK3) Not connected (Clock-3 input) - 15 +3.3VA +3.3V - 10 NC(MTG) Not connected -
26 DA0 IDE Address [0] - 164 NC Not connected - 16 +3.3VA +3.3V - 11 SH Shield -
CN308 PWA-F-LGC (CN308) <-> M/DC-POL 27 DA2 IDE Address [2] - 17 SG Signal ground - 12 SH Shield -
165 SA0 PD address [0] -
Pin No Symbol Name Active 28 IDECS IDE chip select signal - 18 SG Signal ground - 13 SH Shield -
166 SA1 PD address [1] -
1 POMPL-0 Polygonal motor PLL signal L: Normal 29 DD1 FAX data bus [1] - 19 +3.3VB +3.3V - 14 SH Shield -
167 SA2 PD address [2] -
L: ON 30 DD2 FAX data bus [2] - 20 +3.3VB +3.3V -
2 POMON-0A Polygonal motor ON/OFF signal 168 +3.3VA +3.3V
H: OFF 31 DD4 FAX data bus [4] - 21 SG Signal ground - CN206 PWA-F-LRL (CN206) <-> PER-F-LDR (C201)
3 POMCK-0A Polygonal motor reference clock signal - Pin No Symbol Name Active
4 PG Power ground -
32 DD5 FAX data bus [5] - CN117 PWA-F-SYS (CN117) <-> PWA-F-LGC (CN321) 22 SG Signal ground -
33 DD7 FAX data bus [7] - 23 SG Signal ground - 1 SG Signal ground -
5 +24VD1 +24V - Pin No Symbol Name Active
34 DD8 FAX data bus [8] - 24 +5.1VA +5V - 2 +5.1VD +5V -
A1 +5.1VB +5V -
35 DD10 FAX data bus [10] - 25 +5.1VB +5V - 3 +5.1VD +5V -
A2 CBSY-0 System command busy -
CN309 PWA-F-LGC (CN309) <-> PWA-F-LRL (CN204) 36 DD11 FAX data bus [11] -
A3 CMD-0 Command data - 26 +5.1VA +5V - 4 SG Signal ground -
Pin No Symbol Name Active 37 DD13 FAX data bus [13] -
A4 SACK-0 System status acknowledge signal - 5 WRLVL-1 Laser level control signal (reference voltage) -
1 SG Signal ground - 38 DD14 FAX data bus [14] -
A5 SERR-0 System status error signal - CN413 PS-ACC (CN413) <-> PWA-F-LGC (CN307), FAX BOARD (CN702), 6 SG Signal ground -
2 +5.1VD +5V - 39 DD15 FAX data bus [15] - 7 NC Not used -
40 /DIOR IDE I/O read signal -
A6 SBSY-0 System status busy signal - PWA-F-FIL (CN495)/PWA-F-FUS (CN431) 8 SG Signal ground -
3 +5.1VD +5V - A7 STS-0 Status data -
41 /DIOW IDE I/O write signal - Pin No Symbol Name Active 9 PIDT-1 Laser image data (differential signal +) -
4 SG Signal ground - A8 CACK-0 System command acknowledge signal -
42 /DMACK DMA acknowledge signal - 1 +3.3VB +3.3V - 10 PIDT-0 Laser image data (differential signal -) -
5 WRLVL-1 Laser level control signal (reference voltage) - A9 CERR-0 System command error signal -
43 /DLDCS0 Chip select signal - 2 SG Signal ground - 11 SG Signal ground -
6 SG Signal ground - A10 SG Signal ground -
44 /RESET Reset signal L 3 +5.1VB +5V - 12 WRAPC-0 APC write signal -
7 BDIN-1 Laser beam position detection signal - A11 SG Signal ground -
45 DMARQ DMA request signal - 4 +5.1VB +5V - 13 NC Not used -
8 SG Signal ground - A12 SG Signal ground -
46 NC Not connected - 5 SG Signal ground - 14 SHDWM-1 Laser shut down signal -
9 PIDT-1 Laser image data (differential signal +) - A13 IRCLK-1 Clock signal input for image data transmission -
47 FXWP FAX wake-up signal - 6 SG Signal ground - 15 SG Signal ground -
10 PIDT-0 Laser image data (differential signal -) - A14 SG Signal ground -
48 SG Signal ground - 7 +12VB +12V - 16 +5.1VD +5V -
11 SG Signal ground - A15 HSYNC-0 Horizontal scanning synchronized signal -
49 SG Signal ground - 8 SG Signal ground - 17 +5.1VD +5V -
12 WRAPC-0 APC write signal - A16 SG Signal ground -
50 NC Not connected - 9 PDWN-1A AC main power down signal L 18 SG Signal ground -
13 +5.1VB +5V - A17 VSYNC-0 Vertical scanning synchronized signal - 10 PWRFN-0A Power supply cooling fan drive signal -
14 SHDWM-1 Laser shut down signal - B1 MCNT-1 LGC board connection detection signal - 11 +5.1VB +5V -
15 SG Signal ground - CN102 PWA-F-SYS (CN102) <-> PWA-F-SLG (CN4) B2 SYSRST-0 System reset signal - CN207 PWA-F-LRL (CN207) <-> PWA-F-SNS (CN202)
12 SG Signal ground -
16 +5.1VD +5V - Pin No Symbol Name Active B3 IDATX[0] IDA Transmitted data bus [0] - Pin No Symbol Name Active
13 +24VB +24V -
17 +5.1VD +5V - 1 SYSRST System reset signal - B4 IDATX[1] IDA Transmitted data bus [1] - 1 +5.1VB +5V -
14 PG Power ground -
18 SG Signal ground - 2 SCTS Transmission enabled - B5 IDATX[2] IDA Transmitted data bus [2] - 2 SG Signal ground -
3 STXD Transmitted SLG data - B6 IDATX[3] IDA Transmitted data bus [3] - 3 BDIN-1 Laser beam position detection signal -
CN312 PWA-F-LGC (CN312) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (LGC) 4 SRXD Received SLG data - B7 IDATX[4] IDA Transmitted data bus [4] -
CN414 PS-ACC (CN414) <-> PWA-F-LGC (CN301, CN307)
Pin No Symbol Name Active
Pin No Symbol Name Active 5 SRTS Transmission request signal - B8 IDATX[5] IDA Transmitted data bus [5] - CN213 PWA-F-ADU (CN213) <-> ADU-TRL-SNR
6 SCNT SLG board connection detection signal - B9 IDATX[6] IDA Transmitted data bus [6] - 1 +24VD1 +24V -
1 D[0] ROM data bus [0] - Pin No Symbol Name Active
7 SG Signal ground - B10 IDATX[7] IDA Transmitted data bus [7] - 2 +24VD1 +24V -
2 D[2] ROM data bus [2] - 1 SG Signal ground -
8 SVDEN Vertical scanning synchronized signal - B11 SG Signal ground - 3 PG Power ground -
3 D[4] ROM data bus [4] - 2 ADUFL ADU exit sensor detection signal -
9 SDCLK Clock signal for scanning data transmission - B12 IDCLK-1 Clock signal output for image data transmission - 4 PG Power ground -
4 D[6] ROM data bus [6] - 3 +5.1VB +5V -
10 SHDEN Horizontal scanning synchronized signal - B13 SG Signal ground - 5 +24VD2 +24V -
5 RD-0 ROM data read signal -
11 SG Signal ground - B14 IHDEN-0 Data enable of the horizontal scanning direction - 6 +24VD2 +24V -
6 A[0] ROM address bus [0] -
7 A[2] ROM address bus [2] - 12 SG Signal ground - B15 SG Signal ground - 7 PG Power ground - CN214 PWA-F-ADU (CN214) <-> ADU-TRU-SNR
8 A[4] ROM address bus [4] - 13 SCD7 Scanning data [7] - B16 IVDEN-0 Data enable of the vertical scanning direction - 8 PG Power ground - Pin No Symbol Name Active
14 SCD6 Scanning data [6] - B17 +3.3VB +3.3V - 9 +5.1VD +5V - 1 SG Signal ground -
9 A[6] ROM address bus [6] -
15 SCD5 Scanning data [5] - 10 SG Signal ground - 2 ADUFU ADU entrance sensor detection signal -
10 A[8] ROM address bus [8] -
3 +5.1VB +5V -
11 A[10] ROM address bus [10] - 16 SCD4 Scanning data [4] - CN118 PWA-F-SYS (CN118) <-> PWA-F-DSP (J427)
12 A[12] ROM address bus [12] - 17 SCD3 Scanning data [3] -
Pin No Symbol Name Active
CN415 PS-ACC (CN415) <-> PWA-F-SLG (CN6), RADF (CN1) (OPTION)
13 A[14] ROM address bus [14] - 18 SCD2 Scanning data [2] -
1 XSCL-1A LCD data transmission clock - Pin No Symbol Name Active CN215 PWA-F-ADU (CN215) <-> ADU-MOT
14 A[16] ROM address bus [16] - 19 SCD1 Scanning data [1] -
2 LP-1A LCD data latch pulse H 1 +24VD3 +24V - Pin No Symbol Name Active
15 A[18] ROM address bus [18] - 20 SCD0 Scanning data [0] - 2 +24VD3 +24V - 1 +24VD2 +24V -
3 WF-1A LCD frame signal H
16 SG Signal ground - 4 YD-1A LCD scanning line start signal H 3 PG Power ground - 2 FDMA ADU motor drive signal-A -
17 SG Signal ground - CN108 PWA-F-SYS (CN108) <-> PC I/F (IEEE1284) 5 INVGND Signal ground - 4 PG Power ground - 3 FDMB ADU motor drive signal-B -
18 D[1] ROM data bus [1] - Pin No Symbol Name Active 6 BZON-0A Buzzer-ON signal L 5 +5.1VB +5V - 4 FDMC ADU motor drive signal-C -
19 D[3] ROM data bus [3] - 1 STB nStrobe - 7 CPPOW-1A Panel connection detection signal H 6 +5.1VB +5V - 5 FDMD ADU motor drive signal-D -
20 D[5] ROM data bus [5] - 2 DATA0 Data bus [0] - 8 LDCLK-1A LED serial clock - 7 SG Signal ground - 6 +24VD2 +24V -
21 D[7] ROM data bus [7] - 3 DATA1 Data bus [1] - 9 LDDAT-1A LED serial data - 8 SG Signal ground -
22 CS2-0 Chip select signal L 4 DATA2 Data bus [2] - 10 LDLTH-1A LED data latch signal L 9 +24VD4 +24V - CN217 PWA-F-ADU (CN217) <-> ADU-SET-SW
23 A[1] ROM address bus [1] - 5 DATA3 Data bus [3] - 11 LDON1-0A LED drive selection signal-1 L 10 +24VD4 +24V - Pin No Symbol Name Active
24 A[3] ROM address bus [3] - 6 DATA4 Data bus [4] - 12 LDON0-0A LED drive selection signal-0 L 11 PG Power ground -
1 SG Signal ground -
25 A[5] ROM address bus [5] - 7 DATA5 Data bus [5] - 13 SG Signal ground - 12 PG Power ground -
2 COVSW ADU opening/closing detection signal -
26 A[7] ROM address bus [7] - 8 DATA6 Data bus [6] - 14 +5.1VB +5V - 13 NC Not connected -
27 A[9] ROM address bus [9] - 9 DATA7 Data bus [7] - 15 +5.1VB +5V - 14 NC Not connected -
28 A[11] ROM address bus [11] - 10 NACK nAck - 16 +5.1VB +5V - 15 +12VB +12V -
29 A[13] ROM address bus [13] - 11 BUSY Busy - 17 +5.1VB +5V - 16 SG Signal ground -
30 A[15] ROM address bus [15] - 12 PERROR PError - 18 CPRST-0A Reset signal L 17 +3.3VB +3.3V -
31 A[17] ROM address bus [17] - 13 SELECT Select - 19 SG Signal ground - 18 +3.3VB +3.3V -
32 ROMDT-0 Download board connection detection signal L 14 NATFD nAutoFd - 20 RTS0-0A Key controller SIO Transmission request signal - 19 SG Signal ground -
33 +5.1VB +5V - 15 NC Not connected - 21 CTS0-0A Key controller SIO Transmission enabled signal - 20 SG Signal ground -
34 ROMLD-1 External ROM loading status signal L 16 SG Signal ground - 22 SOUT(0) Key controller SIO transmitted serial data - 21 +5.1VB +5V -
17 FG Frame ground - 23 SIN(0) Key controller SIO received serial data - 22 +5.1VB +5V -
CN313 PWA-F-LGC (CN313) <-> IPC (OPTION) 18 LOGIC Peripheral Logic High (Pull-up) H 24 SG Signal ground - 23 SG Signal ground -
Pin No Symbol Name Active 19 SG Signal ground - 25 UD3-1A LCD display data-3 - 24 SG Signal ground -
1 SG Signal ground - 20 SG Signal ground - 26 UD2-1A LCD display data-2 -
2 +5.1VB +5V - 21 SG Signal ground - 27 UD1-1A LCD display data-1 - CN416 PS-ACC (CN416) <-> FINISHER (J599) (OPTION)
3 AD0 System address bus [0] - 22 SG Signal ground - 28 UD0-1A LCD display data-0 - Pin No Symbol Name Active
4 AD2 System address bus [2] - 23 SG Signal ground - 29 SG Signal ground - 1 +5.1VB +5V -
5 AD4 System address bus [4] - 24 SG Signal ground - 30 LCDEN-1A LCD enable signal H 2 SG Signal ground -
6 AD6 System address bus [6] - 25 SG Signal ground - 3 +24VD5 +24V -
7 I/O00 System data bus [0] - 26 SG Signal ground - CN119 PWA-F-SYS (CN119) <-> USB DEVICE 4 PG Power ground -
8 I/O02 System data bus [2] - 27 SG Signal ground -
Pin No Symbol Name Active
9 I/O04 System data bus [4] - 28 SG Signal ground -
1 VBUS +5V - CN418 PS-ACC (CN418) <-> PS-FAN-MOT
10 I/O06 System data bus [6] - 29 SG Signal ground - Pin No Symbol Name Active
2 D- USB serial data -
11 SG Signal ground - 30 SG Signal ground -
3 D+ USB serial data - 1 +24VD1 +24V -
12 WE Write signal - 31 NINIT nInit -
4 SG Signal ground - 2 PWRFN-0A Power supply cooling fan drive signal -
13 CSIP2-0A Chip select signal to IP2 - 32 NFAULT nFault -
14 +5.1VB +5V - 33 NC Not connected -
15 IPCSW-0 IPC connection detection signal L 34 NC Not connected - CN120 PWA-F-SYS (CN120) <-> USB HOST OUT1 PS-HVT (OUT1) <-> MAIN CHARGER WIRE
16 SG Signal ground - 35 NC Not connected - Pin No Symbol Name Active Pin No Symbol Name Active
17 +5.1VB +5V - 36 NSEL IN nSelect In - 1 VBUS +5V - 1 - High-voltage to main charger wire -
18 AD1 System address bus [1] - 2 D- USB serial data -
19 AD3 System address bus [3] - CN109 PWA-F-SYS (CN109) <-> RS-232C (CN172) 3 D+ USB serial data - OUT2 PS-HVT (OUT2) <-> MAIN CHARGER GRID
4 SG Signal ground - Pin No Symbol Name Active
20 AD5 System address bus [5] - Pin No Symbol Name Active
21 AD7 System address bus [7] - 5 VBUS +5V - 1 - High-voltage to main charger grid -
1 TXD Transmitted serial data -
22 I/O01 System data bus [1] - 6 D- USB serial data -
2 RXD Received serial data -
7 D+ USB serial data -
23 I/O03 System data bus [3] - 3 RTS Transmission request signal -
8 SG Signal ground -
OUT3 PS-HVT (OUT3) <-> DEVELOPER BIAS
24 I/O05 System data bus [5] - 4 DSR Data set ready signal - Pin No Symbol Name Active
25 I/O07 System data bus [7] - 5 DTR Data terminal ready signal - 1 - High-voltage to developer charger bias -
26 SG Signal ground - 6 CTS Transmission enabled signal -
27 OE Output enable signal - 7 CNT Carrier detection signal -
28 IPRST-0A IPC reset signal -
OUT4 PS-HVT (OUT4) <-> TRANSFER BIAS
8 SG Signal ground -
29 +5.1VB +5V - Pin No Symbol Name Active
30 SG Signal ground - 1 - High-voltage to transfer charger bias -
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
CN108
SG
SG
SG
SG
/CS
A21
A19
A17
A15
A13
A11
A09
A07
A05
A03
A20
A18
A16
A14
A12
A10
A08
A06
A04
A02
A22
RDX
A A
/WRX
RMSL
CS0-A
CS0-B
DATA0
DATA2
DATA4
DATA6
DATA8
DATA1
DATA3
DATA5
DATA7
DATA9
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
+3.3VA
DATA10
DATA12
DATA14
DATA11
DATA13
DATA15
PWA-F-SYS
Option Slot [1] : CN803
Slot [0] : CN802
Coin controller
14 A15 RST# 11 11 OPBINT(0) DQ8 12 104 VDD 10 11 4 4 NC
NC 10 10 AG 10 10 CLKOE-1 A[8] 10 10 DD6 8 8 A[4] A9 5 9
15 A16 +3.3VA 12 12 SG DQ9 13 105 DQ14 11 10 5 5 NC CN456
NC 11 11 -12VB 11 11 TXEN2-1 A[10] 11 11 DD9 9 9 A[6] B1 4 10
16 A17 GNT# 13 13 IDSEL1 DQS1 14 106 DQ13 12 9 6 6 H2PWR1-0 IH1ON BKCTR-0
/RESET 12 12 AG 12 12 +5.1VB A[12] 12 12 DD5 10 10 A[8] B2 3 11 1 A7 CN308 J529 J203
17 A18 SG 14 14 SG VDD 15 107 DM1 13 8 7 7 H2PWR2-0 SG MNCTR-0 POMPL-0 POMCK-0
NC 13 13 +12VB 13 13 A[16] A[14] 13 13 DD10 11 11 A[10
A[10]
10] B3 2 12 2 A8 1 5 1 5
Bluetooth module
18 A19 PME# 15 15 PCICLK(3) CK1 16 108 VDD 14 7 8 8 H2PWR3-0 NC FLCTR-0 POMON-0A POMPL-0
NC 14 14 +24VB 14 14 A[14] A[16] 14 14 DD4 12 12 A[12
12]
A[12] B4 1 13 3 B1 2 4 2 4
19 A20 AD[30] 16 16 SG /CK1 17 109 DQ14 15 6 9 9 IH1ON-0A H1ERR1 SG POMCK-0A POMON-0
B NC 15 15 16Hz 15 15 A[12] A[18] 15 15 DD11 13 13 A[14
14]
A[14] B5 4 B2 3 3 3 3 M/DC-POL M B
20 A21 +3.3VA 17 17 REQ(1) SG 18 110 DQ15 16 5 10 10 SG H1ERR2 TSIZE3 PG PG
NC 16 16 AG 16 16 A[10] SG 16 16 DD3 14 14 A[16
16]
A[16] B6 5 B3 4 2 4 2
21 A22 AD[28] 18 18 REQ(0) DQ10 19 111 CKE1 17 4 11 11 NC TSIZE2 +24VD1 +24VD1
NC 17 17 CI 17 17 A[8] SG 17 17 DD12 15 15 A[18
18]
A[18] B7 B4 5 1 5 1
22 A23 AD[26] 19 19 +3.3VA DQ11 20 112 VDD 18 3 12 12 H1ERR1-0 TSIZE1
NC 18 18 ANSDET 18 18 A[6] D[1] 18 18 DD2 16 16 SG B8 B5
23 A24 SG 20 20 AD[31] CKE0 21 113 NC 19 2 13 13 H1ERR2-0 TSIZE0
Scrambler board
24 A25 AD[24] 21 21 AD[29] VDD 22 114 DQ20 20 1 14 14 +5.1VB
20 20 REVB 20 20 A[2] D[5] 20 20 DD1 18 18 D[1] B7 CN207 CN202
25 A26 IDSEL 22 22 SG DQ16 23 115 A12 15 15 CTRCNT2 BDIN -1
21 21 INTHOOK 21 21 A[0] D[7] 21 21 DD14 19 19 D[3] CN302 J511 THM-1 B8 3 1
35 35 D[14] SG 33 33 +5.1VB 1 11 15 A7 10 9 10 10
40 A41 RESERVED 37 37 DEVSEL VDD 38 130 A3 2 2 RXIN 30 30 DRV3-1A SG SG
36 36 SG CN701 CN102 INTRQ 34 34 ROMLD-1 17 A8 11 8 11 11
A42 SG 38 38 SG DQ26 39 131 DQ30 3 3 CML 31 31 +24VD2 DRV2-1A WRAPC-0 WRAPC-0
37 37 MOD2DET-0 +5.1VB RESERVED A13 J510 19 A9 12 7 12 12
A43 PAR 39 39 LOCK DQ27 40 132 SG 4 4 LD 1 1 32 32 +24VD2 +24VD2 DRV1-1A +5.1VB NC
38 38 SG DA1 DA1 A14 1 21 A10 13 6 13 13
A A44 AD[15] 40 40 PERR A2 41 133 DQ31 CN115 5 5 ER/HK 2 2 33 33 EXTMA-0A EXTMA-0A DRV0-1A SHDWM-1 SHDWM-1
MODEM board
A49 AD[09] 45 45 AD[14] VDD 46 138 /CK0 10 10 AG 7 7 38 38 +24VD1
44 44 AG DD6 /DASP A16
A50 SG 46 46 SG DQS8 47 139 SG 11 11 -12VB 8 8 39 39 PG
45 45 MD2INT-1 +5.1VB SG B1
A51 SG 47 47 AD[12] A0 48 140 DMB 12 12 AG 9 9 40 40 PG
MOD2CS-0 B2
DDR DIMM
46 46 DD9
A52 C/BE[0]# 48 48 AD[10] CB2 49 141 A10 CN114 13 13 +12VB 10 10 Option SIZE0-0A
47 47 MOD2RST-0 SG J512 PFP/LCF 30 B3 J516
A53 +3.3VA 49 49 M66EN SG 50 142 CB6 VBUS0 1 14 14 NC 11 11 Standard RLC2S-0 SIZE1-0A NC NC
48 48 SG DD12 B1 15 28 B4 CN305 7 1 J518
A54 AD[06] 50 50 SG CB3 51 143 VDD D0- 2 15 15 16Hz 12 12 +5.1VB SIZE2-0A SG SG
49 49 RXEN2-1 SG B2 14 26 B5 A1 6 2 3
A55 AD[04] 51 51 AD[8] BA1 52 144 CB7 D0+ 3 16 16 AG 13 13 RLHSW-0 SIZE3-0A CUEMP-1 CUEMP-1 EMP-
50 50 MEMWRH2-0 SG A B3 13 24 B6 A2 5 3 2 U-SNR
A56 SG 52 52 AD[7] DQ32 53 145 SG SG 4 USB connector 17 17 CI 14 14 RLTRS-0 RETS0-0A +5.1VB +5.1VB
51 51 MEMWRL2-0 SG B4 12 22 B7 A3 4 4 1
A57 AD[02] 53 53 +3.3VA VDD 54 146 DQ36 VBUS1 5 (Host) 18 18 ANSDET 15 15 JSPSW-0 RETS1-0A
52 52 A[18] SG B5 11 20 B8
A58 AD[00] 54 54 AD[5] DQ33 DQ37 D1-
PCI slot
1st drawer
B2 TCK 60 60 SG DQ40 61 153 DQ44 CN111 25 25 +5VA 22 22 SERR-0 +24VD2 SCSWB-0A CURGC-0A CURGC-0
59 59 A[5] -12VB A5 A13 B12 4 6 B15 A7 5 2 2 CST-U-
B3 SG 61 61 +3.3VA VDD 62 154 /RAS VBUS0 1 26 26 -12VB 23 23 SBSY-0 PG +24VD1 +24VD1 FEED-CLT
60 60 A[3] SG A6 A12 B13 3 4 A8 4 3 1
B4 TDO 62 62 +3.3VA /WE 63 155 DQ45 D0- 2 27 27 AG 24 24 STS-0 OFFSET2 LCCNT-0
61 61 A[1] +12VB A7 A11 B14 2 2 B16
B5 +5.1VA 63 63 +3.3VA DQ41 64 156 VDD D0+ 3 28 28 +12VB 25 25 CACK-0 OFFSET1
Internal 62 62 CPURST-0 DA0 A8 A10 B15 1 CN526 J620
B6 +5.1VA 64 64 SG /CAS 65 157 /CS0 SG 4 29 29 NC 26 26 CERR-0 SG SG
USB connector 63 63 CEP2INT-1 DA2 A9 A9 1 A9 3 4 3
B7 INTB# 65 65 +12VA SG 66 158 /CS1 VBUS1 5 30 30 NC 27 27 SG CUFLS-1 CUFLS-0 NEMP-
(for Data overwrite kit) 64 64 +5.1VB IDECS A10 A8 J513 2 A10 2 5 2 U-SNR
B8 INTD# 66 66 +12VA DQ55 67 159 DMS D1- 6 28 28 SG +24VD2 +5.1VB +5.1VB
65 65 +5.1VB DD1 A11 A7 B16 1 IH- 3 A11 1 6 1
B9 PRSNT1# 67 67 +5.1VA DQ42 68 160 SG D1+ 7 29 29 SG IHFN-0A FAN-MOT M
D 66 66 IORD2-0 DD2 A12 A6 B17 2 4 J576 D
B10 RESERVED 68 68 +5.1VA DQ43 69 161 DQ46 SG 8 CN503 30 30 IRCLK-1 NC NC
67 67 IOWR2-0 DD4 A13 A5 7 1 J518
B11 PRSNT2# 69 69 +3.3VA VDD 70 162 DQ47 + 31 31 SG SG SG
1 68 68 D[1] DD5 A14 A4 B1 6 2 3
70 70 OPBINT(1) NC 71 163 NC - 32 32 IHSYNC-0 CPSW2-0 CLEMP-1 CLEMP-1 EMP-
2 69 69 D[3] DD7 A15 A3 B18 B1 5 3 2 L-SNR
71 71 +3.3VA DQ48 72 164 VDD 33 33 SG SG +5.1VB +5.1VB
70 70 D[5] DD8 A16 A2 B19 B3 4 4 1
B14 RESERVED 72 72 PCIRST DQ49 73 165 DQS2 34 34 IVSYNC-0
71 71 D[7] DD10 A17 A1
B15 SG 73 73 +3.3VA SG 74 166 DQS3 Speaker 35 35 MCNT-1 e-STUDIO352/353 only
CN401 72 72 D[9] DD11 B1 B17 J519
B16 CLK 74 74 PCICLK(4) /CK2 75 167 NC 36 36 SYSRST-0 SG SG
NC 73 73 D[11] DD13 B2 B16 B4 3 5 3
B17 SG 75 75 +3.3VA CK2 76 168 VDD 1 37 37 IDATX[0] CLTOP-1 CLTOP-1 CST-L-
+12VB 74 74 D[13] DD14 B3 B15 J564 B5 2 6 2 TRY-CLT
B18 REQ# 76 76 GNT(1) VDD 77 169 DM6 2 38 38 IDATX[1] ADUCL-0 FG FG +5.1VB +5.1VB
-12VB 75 75 D[15] DD15 B4 B14 2 B6 1 7 1
B19 +3.3VA 77 77 GNT(0) DQS6 78 170 DQS4 3 39 39 IDATX[2] ADU-CLT +24VD1
CN812 NC 76 76 +5.1VB /DIOR B5 B13 CN320 J565 1 J577
B20 AD[31] 78 78 SG DQ50 79 171 DQS5 4 40 40 IDATX[3] DV2FN-0A NC NC
NC 77 77 +5.1VB /DIOW B6 B12 2 2 DEV- J312 CN213 6 1 J521
2nd drawer
B21 AD[29] 79 79 PME DQ51 80 172 VDD 4 5 41 41 IDATX[4] +24VD2 M SG CLRGC-0 CLRGC-0
NC 78 78 CEP2CS-0 /DMACK B7 B11 1 1 FAN-MOT2 3 1 B7 5 2 2 CST-L-
B22 SG 80 80 AD[30] SG 81 173 NC 3 6 42 42 IDATX[5] ADU- ADUFL +24VD1 +24VD1 FEED-CLT
AG 79 79 DREQD2-1 /DLDCS0 B8 B10 TRL-SNR 2 2 B8 4 3 1
B23 AD[27] 81 81 +3.3VA VDD-ID 82 174 DQ60 CN810 2 7 43 43 IDATX[6] +5.1VB
+12VA SG 80 80 DACKD2-0 /RESET B9 B9 CN318 1 3 CN304
B24 AD[25] 82 82 AD[28] DQ56 83 175 DQ61 1 1 8 44 44 IDATX[7] NC NC
PG FAX DMARQ B10 B8 B17 J548 J638 CN328 CN214 CN501 18 J620
B25 +3.3VA 83 83 AD[26] DQ57 84 176 SG 2 power relay 45 45 SG +5.1VB +5.1VB SG ADUCL-0 SG SG
07/11
NC NC B11 B7 B16 1 3 1 3 1 17 1 17 B9 3 4 3
B26 C/BE[3]# 84 84 SG VDD 85 177 DM7 3 board CN811 CN702 46 46 IDCLK-1 TBFL-1 TBLF-1 USD-TNR- ADU- ADUFU +24VD1 CLFLS-0 CLFLS-0 NEMP-
FXWUP B12 B6 B15 2 2 2 FLL-SNR1 TRU-SNR 2 2 CN211 CN562 16 2 16 B10 2 5 2 L-SNR
B27 AD[23] 85 85 AD[24] DQS7 86 178 DQ62 +24V 47 47 SG SG SG +5.1VB ADCOV-1 ADCOV-1 +5.1VB +5.1VB
1 1 SG B13 B5 B14 3 1 3 1 3 1 15 3 15 B11 1 6 1
B28 SG 86 86 +3.3VA DQ58 87 179 DQ63 PG FAX board 48 48 IHDEN-0 ADTR1-1 ADTR1-1
2 2 SG B14 B4 J553 CN215 2 14 4 14
B29 AD[21] 87 87 +3.3VA DQ59 88 180 VDD NC NC 49 49 SG BTLSW-1 BTLSW-1 +24VD1 ADCNT-1 ADCNT-1
3 3 NC NC B15 B3 B13 1 1 3 13 5 13
B30 AD[19] 88 88 AD[22] SG 89 181 SA0 50 50 IVDEN-0 FDMA SG SG
JPD model only B16 B2 2 TNR-SW 2 4 12 6 12
B31 +3.3VA 89 89 AD[20] NC 90 182 SA1 +3.3VB SG SG FDMB PWA- +5.1VB +5.1VB
B17 B1 B12 3 M ADU-MOT 3 5 11 7 11 CN306
B32 AD[17] 90 90 SG SDA 91 183 SA2 FDMC F-ADU ADTR2-1 ADTR2-1 NC
J542 J508 4 6 10 8 10 A1
B33 C/BE[2]# 91 91 AD[18] SCL 92 184 VDD-SPD SG SG FDMD CRT-DOWNA CRT-DOWNA NC
B11 1 5 1 SIDE-COV- 5 7 9 9 9 A2 J515
B34 SG 92 92 AD[16] SDCSW-1 SDCSW-1 SW ADM2A-0A ADM2A-0A CLTRM-0A
CN14 CN1 J34 CN10 B10 2 4 2 CN216 8 8 10 8 A3 1
B35 IRDY# 93 93 +3.3VA +5.1VB NC ADM2C-0A ADM2C-0A CLTRM-1A TRY-MOT M
E 26 1 2 A1 J509 1 9 7 11 7 A4 2 E
B36 +3.3VA 94 94 FRAME +5.1VB Reserved +24VD4 +5.1VB +5.1VB ADM2B-0A ADM2B-0A
25 2 1 A2 CN4 CN101 B9 3 3 1 2 10 6 12 6
B37 DEVSEL# 95 95 SG SG FANSLG SYSRST CLFED-1 CLFED-1 ADM2D-0A ADM2D-0A
24 3 J33 A3 20 1 B8 4 2 2 FED-L-SNR NC 3 11 5 13 5 J523
B38 SG 96 96 TRDY SG +5VAPS SCTS SG SG +24VD1 CUTRC-0B
23 4 3 A4 19 2 B7 5 1 3 4 CN212 CN563 4 14 4 A5 1 CST-TR-
B39 LOCK# 97 97 SG CCDRS APSR STXD +24VD1 +24VD1 +24VD1 L-CLT
22 5 APS-R 2 A5 18 3 J550 J506 5 1 3 15 3 A6 2
B40 PERR# 98 98 STOP SG SG SRXD +5.1VB +5.1VB +24VD1 PG
21 6 1 A6 17 4 B6 1 6 1 CN311 CN217 2 2 16 2
B41 +3.3VA 99 99 +3.3VA CN118 CN118 CCDCP SRTS CUFED-1 CUFED-1 SG PG PG
20 7 J32 16 5 B5 2 5 2 FED-U-SNR ADU- 1 2 3 1 17 1 J522
B42 SERR# 100 100 +3.3VA SG +5VAPS SCNT SG SG SET-SW COVSW PG CFEDC-0A
19 8 3 A7 15 6 B4 3 4 3 2 1 4 A7 1 CST-TR-
B43 +3.3VA 101 101 SG TIP 1 63 +3.3VA CCDSH APSC SG CN120 CN412 CN413 CN307 +24VD1 H-CLT
18 9 APS-C 2 A8 14 7 J507 A8 2
B44 C/BE[1]# 102 102 SG RING 2 64 FRAME SG SG SVDEN PWR-DN +3.3VB +5.1VB +5.1VB
17 10 1 A9 13 8 26 1 1 1 B3 4 3 1
B45 AD[14] 103 103 PAR BPMJ-3 3 65 CLKRUN CCDCK2B SDCLK PWR-EN SG PSTPC-1 PSTPC-1
16 11 J31 12 9 25 2 2 2 B2 5 2 2 RGST-SNR Automatic duplexing unit J514
B46 SG 104 104 AD[15] BPMJ-1 4 66 TRDY SG +5VAPS SHDEN SG +5.1VB SG SG SG
15 12 3 B1 11 10 24 3 3 3 B1 6 1 3 A9 1
B47 AD[12] 105 105 +3.3VA BPMJ-6 5 67 SERR CCDCK2A APS3 SG Reserved(-12VB) +5.1VB NC CUSW-0 CST-U-SW
14 13 APS3 2 B2 10 11 23 4 4 4 A17 J632 J631 CN545 A10 2
B48 AD[10] 106 106 AD[13] BPMJ-2 6 68 STOP SG SG SG SG SG NC +5.1VB NC NC NC
13 14 1 B3 9 12 22 5 5 5 A16 J504 1 3 1 18 1 36
B49 M66EN 107 107 AD[11] BPMJ-7 7 69 SG CCDCK1A SCD7 +12VB SG RGTCL-0A SFB- SFBFED SFSSW
+12VA
PG
NC
12 15 J30 8 13 21 6 6 6 A15 2 FED-SNR 2 2 2 17 2 35 J524
B50 SG 108 108 SG BPMJ-4 8 70 +3.3VA SG +5VAPS SCD6 SG +12VB +24VD2 RGT-CLT SG +5.1VB SG
PWA-F-CCD
11 16 3 B4 7 14 20 7 7 7 A14 1 3 1 3 16 3 34 A11 1
B51 SG 109 109 AD[9] BPMJ-8 9 71 PERR CCD-EVEN APS2 SCD5 +12VA SG SFBFED-1 CLSW-0 CST-L-SW
3 1
2 2
1 3
J634
10 17 APS2 2 B5 6 15 19 8 8 8 J533 J629 15 4 33 A12 2
B52 AD[08] 110 110 SG BPMJ-5 10 72 DEVSEL SG SG SCD4 SG PDWN-1A TNRMT-1A COLSFB SG NC
9 18 1 B6 5 16 18 9 9 9 A13 1 2 14 5 32 A13
NC
B53 AD[07] 111 111 C/BE[0] LED1 GRNP 11 73 C/BE[1] SCD3 TNRMT-0A TNR-MOT SFB-SOL
SCAN-MOT
XR LDCLK-1A CN122 13 13 MAD[14]
MAD[14
MAD 14] 6 6 6 6 6 4 4 CN317 J557 J535
3 A8 A8 A8 8 PME 34 96 AD[00] +12VA PG ATSSW-0
YU LDDAT-1A 3 14 14 MAD[16]
MAD[16
MAD 16] 5 3 3 A1 A10 A1 8 1 J546
4 A7 A9 A7 9 AD[29] 35 97 +5.1VA SG +24VD2 ATSVR-1A ATSVR-1A
Touch panel
LDLTH-1A 2 15 15 MAD[18]
MAD[18
MAD 18] 4 2 2 A2 A9 A2 7 2 1
3 +5.1VA 19 19 MDT[3]
MDT 1 22 22 24 A6 A5 A6 3 6
SG A2 A14 A2 14 +3.3VA 40 102 SG SG SG
4 +5.1VA 20 20 MDT[5]
MDT 2 21 21 23
1
2
3
4
J547
CN2
+5.1VA A1 A15 A1 15 AD[25] 41 103 AC SYNC CN1 CN9 +5.1VB +5.1VB DRTH-0A DRTH-0A
5 +5.1VA 21 21 MDT[7]
MDT 3 20 20 22 A7 A4 A7 2 7 2 THMS-
PG
LCD
LMPON-A J527
D.OFF B13 B3 B13 18 AD[26] 44 106 AC SDATA OUT INV-EXP 3 3 SG SG POLFN-0A SG NC
8 SG 24 24 PNLDT3 6 17 17 19 2 Option J1 CN313 A10 A2 A9
G D0 B12 B4 B12 19 C/BE[3] 45 107 AC BIT CLK +24VD4 +3.3VB +3.3VB +24VD1 LSU-FAN-MOT M RSTSW-0A NC G
9 RTS0-0A 25 25 MAD[5]
MAD 4 4 7 16 16 18 1 1 1 SG A11 A1 A10
D1 B11 B5 B11 20 AD[24] 46 108 AC CODEC ID0 +24VD4 +3.3VB +3.3VB +24VD2
10 CTS0-0A 26 26 MAD[7]
MAD 5 5 8 15 15 17 2 2 +5.1VB A12 J562
D2 B10 B6 B10 21 AD[23] 47 109 AC CODEC ID1 AG SG SG SG
11 SOUT[0] 27 27 MAD[9]
MAD 9 14 14 16 3 3 AD0 A13 B10 B1 1
D3 B9 B7 B9 22 IDSEL 48 110 AC RESET +12VB +12VB TBNFL-1 TBNFL-1 USD-TNR-
12 SIN[0] 28 28 MAD[11]
MAD[11
MAD 11] 10 13 13 15 4 4 AD2 A14 B9 B2 2 FLL-SNR2
B8 B8 B8 23 SG 49 111 MOD AUDIO MON PG NC +5.1VB +5.1VB
SG 29 29 MAD[13]
MAD[13
MAD 13] 11 14 5 5 AD4 A15 B8 B3 3
B7 B9 B7 24 SG 50 112 RSV PG NC
J429 J426 UD3-1A 30 30 MAD[15]
MAD[15
MAD 15] 12 13 6 6 AD6
B6 B10 B6 25 AD[21] 51 113 AUDIO GND +24VD4 PG +24VD2
SCN15 UD2-1A 31 31 MAD[17]
MAD[17
MAD 17] 13 12 12 12 7 7 I/FO00 B1 J539
1 1 B5 B11 B5 26 AD[22] 52 114 SG +24VD4 PG ERSLP-0A +24VD2
SCN14 UD1-1A 32 32 ROMDT PWA-F-SLG 14 11 11 11 8 8 I/O02 B2 1 MID-
2 2 B4 B12 B4 27 AD[19] 53 115 SYS AUDIO OUT +24VD4 +24VD2 MIDFN-0A FAN-MOT M
SCN13 UD0-1A 33 33 +5.1VB 10 10 10 9 9 I/O04 B3 B7 B4 2
3 3 B3 B13 B3 28 AD[20] 54 116 SYS AUDIO IN +24VD4 MIIDFN-0A
SCN12 SG 34 34 LED 9 9 9 10 10 I/O06 B4 B6 B5 J538 J504
4 4 B2 B14 B2 29 SG 55 117 SYS AUDIO OUT GND CN416 +24VD2 +24VD2
SCN11 LCDEN-1A CN531 11 11 SG B5 B5 B6 4 1 1 EXT-
PWA-F-DSP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
5 5 B1 B15 B1 30 PAR 56 118 SYS AUDIO IN GND +5.1VB +5.1VB EXTFN-0A EXTFN-0A FAN-MOT M
RET0 1 1 1 12 12 WE B6 B4 B7 3 2 2
CN7
DFTXD
DFRAK
DFCNT
DFRXD
DFRRQ
NC
RET8 16 16 SG B9 B1 B10 J534
10 10 IRDY 61 123 VCC5V FG NC +24VD2
RET9 17 17 +5.1VB B10 2
IPC board
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
LP-ERS
J37
10
CN2
2
10
11
2 NC SG SG +5.1VB +5.1VB SG SG
LDFC-4 CN1 11 11 1 1 8 8 8 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 22 22 I/O01 J541
3 3 SG SG NC NC PWA-F- NAD, SAD, TWD TXD TXD RSTSW-0A
LDFC-5 Option CN107 1 12 12 2 2 7 7 7 2 2 2 3 3 23 23 I/O03 6 3 2 MAIN-SW
4 4 +5.1VB +5.1VB SG SG FIL models: standard SG SG +24VD2
PWA-F-KEY
LDFC-6 L/S 2 13 13 3 3 6 6 6 3 3 5 5 3 4 4 24 24 I/O05 5 4 1 (RESET)
5 5 1 +5.1VB +5.1VB FG
LDFC-7 FULL-C 3 14 14 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 25 25 I/O07 J540
6 6 2 PG PG F-CNT +5.1VB +5.1VB
H LDFC-8 MONO-C RADF 4 15 15 5 5 4 4 4 9 9 6 6 26 26 SG B11 4 5 1 H
7 7 Coin controller / 3 PG PG Finisher CNT-GND NC HMS-1A HMS-1A
LDFC-9 B/W 5 16 16 6 6 3 3 3 CN418 7 7 27 27 OE B12 3 6 2 TEMP/
8 8 Copy key card 4 +24VD3 +24VD3 +24VD1 + +5.1VB SG SG
LDFC-10 +5.1VA 6 17 17 7 7 2 2 2 1 CN431 8 8 28 28 IPRST-0A B13 2 7 3 HUMI-SNR
9 9 5 +24VD3 +24VD3 PWRFN-0A - PS-FAN-MOT M +5.1VB SG F-CNT TEMP-1 TEMP-1
LDFC-11 SG 7 18 18 8 8 1 1 1 2 1 9 9 29 29 +5.1VB B14 1 8 4
10 10 6 SG JPD, ASD, AUD, CND NC CNT-GND NC
LDFC-12 NC 19 19 2 PWA-F- 10 10 30 30 SG B15
11 11 7 models: standard +24VD5
LDFC-13 FG 20 20 FG 3 FUS 11
12 12 Option MJD model: option PG
LDFC-15 4 12
13 13
LDON0
14 14
LDON1
15 15
SG
16 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
10.5 Connector Table (e-STUDIO352/353/452/453)
CN301 PWA-F-LGC (CN301) <-> MAIN-MOT, PS-ACC(CN414) CN314 PWA-F-LGC (CN314) <-> COIN CONTROLLER (OPTION)/COPY CN105 PWA-F-SYS (CN105) <-> DDR DIMM CN115 PWA-F-SYS (CN115) <-> USB CONNECTOR (DEVICE) CN1 PWA-F-SLG (CN1) <-> PWA-F-CCD (CN14) J422 PWA-F-DSP (J422) <-> LCD PANEL
Pin No Symbol Name Active KEY CARD (OPTION) Pin No Symbol Name Active Pin No Symbol Name Active Pin No Symbol Name Active Pin No Symbol Name Active
1 +24VD2 +24V - Pin No Symbol Name Active 1 VREF Reference voltage - 1 VBUS +5V - 1 +5.1VB +5V - 1 YD Y-axis touch position detection terminal (D) -
2 +24VD2 +24V - A1 +24VD2 +24V - 2 DQ0 Memory data bus [0] - 2 D- USB serial data - 2 +5.1VB +5V - 2 KL X-axis touch position detection terminal (L) -
3 +24VD2 +24V - A2 CTRON-0 Total counter ON signal - 3 SG Signal ground - 3 D+ USB serial data - 3 SG Signal ground - 3 XR X-axis touch position detection terminal (R) -
4 +24VD2 +24V - A3 CTRCNT-0 Copy permitting signal L 4 DQ1 Memory data bus [1] - 4 SG Signal ground - 4 SG Signal ground - 4 YU Y-axis touch position detection terminal (U) -
5 PG Power ground - A4 MCRUN-0 Copying operation signal L 5 DQS0 Data strobe signal [0] - 5 CCDRS CCD RS signal -
6 PG Power ground - A5 EXTCTR-0 Exit sensor ON signal L 6 DQ2 Memory data bus [2] - CN117 PWA-F-SYS (CN117) <-> HDD-FAN-MOT 6 SG Signal ground - J423 PWA-F-DSP (J423) <-> LCD BACK LIGHT
7 PG Power ground - A6 PG Power ground - 7 VDD +2.5V - Pin No Symbol Name Active 7 CCDCP CCD CP signal - Pin No Symbol Name Active
8 PG Power ground - A7 BKCTR-0 Black and white mode counter ON signal L 8 DQ3 Memory data bus [3] - 1 +12V +12V - 8 SG Signal ground - 1 CCFL+ High-voltage terminal (High) -
A8 MNCTR-0 Mono-color mode counter ON signal L 9 NC Not connected - 2 SG Signal ground - 9 CCDSH CCD TG signal - 2 NC Not connected -
CN302 PWA-F-LGC (CN302) <-> JOB SEPARATOR (OPTION)/OFFSET B1 FLCTR-0 Full color mode counter ON signal L 10 NC Not connected - 10 SG Signal ground - 3 CCFL- high-voltage terminal (Low) -
11 SG Signal ground - 11 CCDCK2B CCD shift clock-2B -
TRAY (OPTION)/BRIDGE UNIT (OPTION), IH-FAN-MOT, EXIT- B2 SG Signal ground -
12 DQ8 Memory data bus [8] - CN118 PWA-F-SYS (CN118) <-> WIRELESS LAN MODULE (OPTION) 12 SG Signal ground -
MOT, FUS-FAN-MOT, EXIT-SNR,THMS-S-HTR, THMS-C-HTR
B3 SIZE3 Paper size signal-3 -
13 DQ9 Memory data bus [9] - Pin No Symbol Name Active 13 CCDCK2A CCD shift clock-2A -
J424 PWA-F-DSP (J424) <-> LCD PANEL
B4 SIZE2 Paper size signal-2 - 1 TIP Not used - Pin No Symbol Name Active
Pin No Symbol Name Active B5 SIZE1 Paper size signal-1 - 14 DQS1 Data strobe signal [1] - 14 SG Signal ground -
A1 FUSSW-1A Paper exit unit connection detection signal H 15 VDD +2.5V - 2 RING Not used - 15 CCDCK1A CCD shift clock-1A - 1 FRAME LCD scanning line start signal -
B6 SIZE0 Paper size signal-0 - 3 8PMJ-3 Not used - 2 LAOD LCD data latch pulse -
A2 MTH+-1A Fuser roller center thermistor detection signal Analog B7 +5.1VB +5V - 16 CK1 Clock-1 input - 16 SG Signal ground -
A3 MTH--1A Fuser roller center thermistor detection signal Analog 17 /CK1 Differential clock-1 input - 4 8PMJ-1 Not used - 17 CCD-EVEN CCD even data - 3 CP LCD data transmission clock -
B8 CTRCNT2 Copy key card detection signal - 5 8PMJ-6 Not used - 4 SG Ground -
A4 ETH+-1A Fuser roller side thermistor detection signal Analog 18 SG Signal ground - 18 SG Signal ground -
A5 ETH--1A Fuser roller side thermistor detection signal Analog 19 DQ10 Memory data bus [10] - 6 8PMJ-2 Not used - 19 CCD-ODD CCD odd data - 5 +5.1VA +5V -
A6 NC Not connected -
CN315 PWA-F-LGC (CN315) <-> KEY COPY COUNTER (OPTION) 20 DQ11 Memory data bus [11] - 7 8PMJ-7 Not used - 20 SG Signal ground - 6 SG Signal ground -
A7 NC Not connected - Pin No Symbol Name Active 21 CKE0 Clock enable signal - 8 8PMJ-4 Not used - 21 AG Analog ground - 7 VEE Ground -
A8 +5.1VB +5V - 1 NC Not connected - 22 VDD +2.5V - 9 8PMJ-8 Not used - 22 AG Analog ground - 8 /D.OFF LCD enable signal -
A9 EXTSW-1 Exit sensor detection signal - 2 SG Signal ground - 23 DQ16 Memory data bus [16] - 10 8PMJ-5 Not used - 23 AG Analog ground - 9 D0 LCD display data-0 -
A10 SG Signal ground - 3 KCTRC-0 Key copy counter/Copy key card connection detection signal L 24 DQ17 Memory data bus [17] - 11 LED1 GRNP Not used - 24 +12VB +12V - 10 D1 LCD display data-1 -
A11 +24VD2 +24V - 4 +24VD2 +24V - 25 DQS2 Data strobe signal [2] - 12 LED2 YELP Not used - 25 +12VB +12V - 11 D2 LCD display data-2 -
A12 FUSFN-0A Fuser unit cooling fan motor drive signal - 5 KCTR0-0 Key copy counter ON signal - 26 SG Signal ground - ENABLE/DIS- 26 +12VB +12V - 12 D3 LCD display data-3 -
13 Wireless LAN enable signal -
A13 +24VD2 +24V - 6 NC Not connected - 27 A9 Memory address bus [9] - ABLE
A14 +24VD2 +24V - 28 DQ18 Memory data bus [18] - 14 LED2 YELN Not used - CN2 PWA-F-SLG (CN2) <-> PLTN-SNR, HOME-SNR J425 PWA-F-DSP (J425) <-> PWA-F-KEY (J428)
A15 EXTMA-0A Exit motor drive signal-A - CN316 PWA-F-LGC (CN316) <-> PS-IH 29 A7 Memory address bus [7] - 15 CHSGND Signal ground -
Pin No Symbol Name Active Pin No Symbol Name Active
A16 EXTMB-0A Exit motor drive signal-B - Pin No Symbol Name Active 30 VDD +2.5V - 16 RSV Not used -
1 SG Signal ground - 1 LDFC-1 LED driver output (1) L
A17 EXTMC-0A Exit motor drive signal-C - A1 IH2ON-0A IH2 ON/OFF signal H 31 DQ19 Memory data bus [19] - 17 INTB# Interrupt request-B - 2 LDFC-2 LED driver output (2) L
2 PLTN-1A Platen sensor detection signal -
A18 EXTMD-0A Exit motor drive signal-D - A2 +5V SW +5V - 32 A5 Memory address bus [5] - 18 +5.1VA +5V - 3 LDFC-4 LED driver output (4) L
3 +5V +5V -
A19 +5VSW +5V - A3 H1PWR1-0 Heater H1 power data-1 - 33 DQ24 Memory data bus [24] - 19 +3.3VA +3.3V - 4 LDFC-5 LED driver output (5) L
4 SG Signal ground -
B1 RLC2S-0 Not used - A4 H1PWR2-0 Heater H1 power data-2 - 34 SG Signal ground - 20 INTA# Interrupt request-A - 5 LDFC-6 LED driver output (6) L
5 HOME-1A Carriage home position sensor detection signal -
B2 +5.1VB +5V - A5 H1PWR3-0 Heater H1 power data-3 - 35 DQ25 Memory data bus [25] - 21 RSV Not used - 6 LDFC-7 LED driver output (7) L
6 +5V +5V -
Job separator: lower stack sensor detection signal A6 NC Not connected - 36 DQS3 Data strobe signal [3] - 22 RSV Not used - 7 LDFC-8 LED driver output (8) L
B3 RLHSW-0 - A7 NC Not connected - 37 A4 Memory address bus [2] - 23 SG Signal ground - 8 LDFC-9 LED driver output (9) L
Offset tray: stack sensor detection signal
A8 NC Not connected - 38 VDD +2.5V - 24 +3.3VA +3.3V - CN7 PWA-F-SLG (CN7) <-> RADF (CN2) (OPTION) 9 LDFC-10 LED driver output (10) L
Job separator: paper jam sensor detection signal
B4 RLTRS-0 - A9 NC Not connected - 39 DQ26 Memory data bus [26] - 25 CLK PCI clock - Pin No Symbol Name Active 10 LDFC-11 LED driver output (11) L
Offset tray: paper feed sensor detection signal 1 DFAK RADF acknowledge signal -
B1 NC Not connected - 40 DQ27 Memory data bus [27] - 26 RST# Reset signal - 11 LDFC-12 LED driver output (12) L
B5 JSPSW-0 Job separator/offset tray connection detection signal L 2 DFSCST VARID signal from RADF -
B2 H2PWR1-0 Heater H2 power data-1 - 41 A2 Memory address bus [1] - 27 SG Signal ground - 12 LDFC-13 LED driver output (13) L
B6 RLCNT-0 Not used - 3 DFRXD Received serial data -
B3 H2PWR2-0 Heater H2 power data-2 - 42 SG Signal ground - 28 +3.3VA +3.3V - 13 LDFC-15 LED driver output (15) L
L: Offset tray 4 SG Signal ground -
B7 OPCHK1 Job separator/offset tray judgment signal B4 H2PWR3-0 Heater H2 power data-3 - 43 A1 Memory address bus [1] - 29 REQ# Data request signal - 14 LDON0 LED common driver signal (0) H
H: Job separator 30 GNT# Grant - 5 DFTXD RADF transmitted serial data -
B5 IH1ON-0A IH1 ON/OFF signal H 44 CB0 Not used - 15 LDON1 LED common driver signal (1) H
B8 RLCSW-0 Job separator/offset tray cover switch detection signal L 31 +3.3VA +3.3V - 6 SG Signal ground -
B6 SG Signal ground - 45 CB1 Not used - 16 SG Signal ground -
B9 SG Signal ground - 32 SG Signal ground - 7 DFRAK Acknowledge signal from RADF -
B7 IH DUTY IH1/2 duty control signal - 46 VDD +2.5V -
Job separator: upper stack sensor detection signal 33 AD[31] PCI address/data bus [31] - 8 DFRRQ Request signal from RADF -
B10 JFSL2ON
Offset tray: separation sensor detection signal
- B8 H1 ERR1-0 Heater H1 error signal-1 - 47 DQS8 Data strobe signal [8] -
9 DFRQ RADF request signal - J426 PWA-F-DSP (J426) <-> PWA-F-KEY (J429)
B9 H1 ERR2-0 Heater H1 error signal-2 - 48 A0 Memory address bus [0] - 34 PME# +3.3V -
B11 GASOL-0A Solenoid driving signal - 10 DFCNT RADF connection detection signal - Pin No Symbol Name Active
49 CB2 Not used - 35 AD[29] PCI address/data bus [29] -
B12 +24VD2 +24V - 1 SCN15 Button scanning signal (5) -
36 RSV Not used -
CN317 PWA-F-LGC (CN317) <-> ATTNR-SNR, THMS-DRM, USD-TNR- 50 SG Signal ground - 2 SCN14 Button scanning signal (4) -
B13 PG Power ground - 51 CB3 Not used - 37 SG Signal ground - CN9 PWA-F-SLG (CN9) <-> INV-EXP (CN1)
B14 OFFSET2 OCT motor drive signal-2 - FLL-SNR2, MID-FAN-MOT, EXIT-FAN-MOT, SP-FAN-MOT, LP- 52 BA1 Bank select-1 - 38 AD[30] PCI address/data bus [30] - Pin No Symbol Name Active
3 SCN13 Button scanning signal (3) -
4 SCN12 Button scanning signal (2) -
B15 OFFSET1 OCT motor drive signal-1 - ERS, FRNT-COV-SW, MAIN-SW, TEMP/HUMI-SNR 53 DQ32 Memory data bus [32] - 39 AD[27] PCI address/data bus [27] - 1 PG Power ground - 5 SCN11 Button scanning signal (1) -
B16 +24VD2 +24V - Pin No Symbol Name Active 54 VDD +2.5V - 40 +3.3VA +3.3V - 2 PG Power ground -
B17 IHFN-0A IH board cooling fan motor drive signal - 6 RET0 Button scanning return signal (0) -
A1 ATSSW-0 Auto toner sensor connection detection signal L 55 DQ33 Memory data bus [33] - 41 AD[25] PCI address/data bus [25] - 3 LMPON-A Exposure lamp ON signal H
L: e-STUDIO350 7 RET1 Button scanning return signal (1) -
A2 ATSVR-1A Black auto-toner sensor reference voltage Analog 56 DQS4 Data strobe signal [4] - 42 AD[28] PCI address/data bus [28] - 4 +24VD4 +24V -
B18 CPSW2-0 e-STUDIO350/450 judgment signal 8 RET2 Button scanning return signal (2) -
H: e-STUDIO450 A3 +24VD2 +24V - 57 DQ34 Memory data bus [34] - 43 RSV Not used - 5 +24VD4 +24V - 9 RET3 Button scanning return signal (3) -
B19 SG Signal ground - A4 ATS-1A Black auto-toner sensor detection signal Analog 58 SG Signal ground - 44 AD[26] PCI address/data bus [26] -
10 RET8 Button scanning return signal (8) -
A5 SG Signal ground - 59 BA0 Bank select-0 - 45 C/BE(3]# Command and byte enable-3 - CN10 PWA-F-SLG (CN10) <-> APS1 (A4 SERIES ONLY), APS2, APS3, 11 RET9 Button scanning return signal (9) -
CN303 PWA-F-LGC (CN303) <-> PFP (OPTION)/LCF (OPTION) A6 SG Signal ground - 60 DQ35 Memory data bus [35] - 46 AD[24] PCI address/data bus [24] -
47 AD[23] PCI address/data bus [23] - APS4, APS5
Pin No Symbol Name Active A7 DRTH-0A Drum thermistor detection signal Analog 61 DQ40 Memory data bus [40] -
CN213 PWA-F-ADU (CN213) <-> ADU-TRL-SNR
A8 SG Signal ground - 62 VDD +2.5V - 48 IDSEL Wireless LNA IDselect sIgnal - Pin No Symbol Name Active
A1 CLKC-1A PFP/LCF output select signal -
A9 FRDSW-0 Front cover opening/closing switch signal - 63 /WE Data write enable signal - 49 SG Signal ground - 1 NC Not connected - Pin No Symbol Name Active
A2 CLKB-1A PFP/LCF output select signal -
A10 SG Signal ground - 64 DQ41 Memory data bus [41] - 50 SG Signal ground - 2 +24VD4 +24V(Reserved) - 1 SG Signal ground -
A3 SCSWC-0A PFP/LCF input select signal -
A11 RSTSW-0A Reset signal from the main switch L 65 /CAS Column address strobe signal - 51 AD[21] PCI address/data bus [21] - 3 FANSLG Not connected - 2 ADUFL ADU exit sensor detection signal -
A4 DRV7-1A PFP/LCF driver control signal -
A12 +24VD2 +24V - 66 SG Signal ground - 52 AD[22] PCI address/data bus [22] - 4 +5VAPS +5V - 3 +5.1VB +5V -
A5 DRV6-1A PFP/LCF driver control signal -
A13 SG Signal ground - 67 DQS5 Data strobe signal [5] - 53 AD[19] PCI address/data bus [19] - 5 APSR-0A Automatic original detection sensor signal -
A6 DRV5-1A PFP/LCF driver control signal -
A7 DRV4-1A PFP/LCF driver control signal - A14 TBNFL-1 Toner bag full detection sensor-2 signal - 68 DQ42 Memory data bus [42] - 54 AD[20] PCI address/data bus [20] - 6 SG Signal ground - CN214 PWA-F-ADU (CN214) <-> ADU-TRU-SNR
A15 +5.1VB +5V - 69 DQ43 Memory data bus [43] - 55 SG Signal ground - 7 +5VAPS +5V - Pin No Symbol Name Active
A8 DRV3-1A PFP/LCF driver control signal -
B1 +24VD2 +24V - 70 VDD +2.5V - 56 PAR Parity - 8 APSC-0A Automatic original detection sensor signal - 1 SG Signal ground -
A9 DRV2-1A PFP/LCF driver control signal -
B2 ERSLP-0A Exposure lamp drive signal - 71 NC Not connected - 57 AD[17] PCI address/data bus [17] - 9 SG Signal ground - 2 ADUFU ADU entrance sensor detection signal -
A10 DRV1-1A PFP/LCF driver control signal -
B3 +24VD2 +24V - 72 DQ48 Memory data bus [48] - 58 AD[18] PCI address/data bus [18] - 10 +5VAPS +5V - 3 +5.1VB +5V -
A11 DRV0-1A PFP/LCF driver control signal -
B4 MIIDFN-0A Middle fan motor drive signal - 73 DQ49 Memory data bus [49] - 59 C/BE(2)# Command and byte enable-2 - 11 APS3-0A Automatic original detection sensor signal -
A12 PFRST-0 Reset signal -
60 AD[16] PCI address/data bus [16] - 12 SG Signal ground -
A13 +5.1VB +5V - B5 +24VD2 +24V - 74 SG Signal ground -
13 +5VAPS +5V -
CN215 PWA-F-ADU (CN215) <-> ADU-MOT
B6 EXTFN-0A Exhaust fan motor drive signal - 75 /CK2 Differential clock-2 input - 61 IRDY# Initiator ready L
A14 SG Signal ground -
14 APS2-0A Automatic original detection sensor signal - Pin No Symbol Name Active
A15 +24VD1 +24V - B7 +24VD2 +24V - 76 CK2 Clock-2 input - 62 SG Signal ground -
63 +3.3VA +3.3V - 15 SG Signal ground - 1 +24VD2 +24V -
A16 +24VD1 +24V - B8 SPFN0A Sub-separation fan motor drive signal - 77 VDD +2.5V -
64 FRAME# Cycle frame L 16 +5VAPS +5V - 2 FDMA ADU motor drive signal-A -
B1 PG Power ground - B9 NC Not connected - 78 DQS6 Data strobe signal [6] -
65 CLKRUN# Signal ground - 17 APS1-0A Automatic original detection sensor signal - 3 FDMB ADU motor drive signal-B -
B2 PG Power ground - B10 NC Not connected - 79 DQ50 Memory data bus [50] -
66 TRDY# Target ready L 18 SG Signal ground - 4 FDMC ADU motor drive signal-C -
B3 SIZE0-0A Size data bus-0 - B11 +5.1VB +5V - 80 DQ51 Memory data bus [51] -
67 SERR# System Error L 5 FDMD ADU motor drive signal-D -
B4 SIZE1-0A Size data bus-1 - B12 HMS-1A Humidity sensor signal Analog 81 SG Signal ground -
6 +24VD2 +24V -
B5 SIZE2-0A Size data bus-2 - B13 SG Signal ground - 82 VDD-ID Not used - 68 STOP# Stop L CN19 PWA-F-SLG (CN19) <-> SCAN-MOT
B6 SIZE3-0A Size data bus-3 - B14 TEMP-1 Temperature sensor signal Analog 83 DQ56 Memory data bus [56] - 69 SG Signal ground - Pin No Symbol Name Active
B15 NC Not connected - 84 DQ57 Memory data bus [57] - 70 +3.3VA +3.3V - 1 SCNM-BB Scan motor drive signal-B -
CN217 PWA-F-ADU (CN217) <-> ADU-SET-SW
B7 RETS0-0A PFP/LCF sensor detection signal -
85 VDD +2.5V - 71 PERR# Data parity Error L 2 +24VD4 +24V - Pin No Symbol Name Active
B8 RETS1-0A PFP/LCF sensor detection signal -
72 DEVSEL# Device select L 1 SG Signal ground -
B9 RETS2-0A PFP/LCF sensor detection signal - CN318 PWA-F-LGC (CN318) <-> MAIN-MOT, DEV-FAN-MOT1, DEV-CLT, 86 DQS7 Data strobe signal [7] -
73 C/BE(1)# Command and byte enable-1 -
3 SCNM-B Scan motor drive signal-B -
2 COVSW ADU opening/closing detection signal -
B10 RETS3-0A PFP/LCF sensor detection signal - 87 DQ58 Memory data bus [58] - 4 SCNM-AB Scan motor drive signal-A -
B11 RETS4-0A PFP/LCF sensor detection signal -
TNR-MOT, RGT-CLT, RGST-SNR, FED-U-SNR, FED-L-SNR, SIDE- 88 DQ59 Memory data bus [59] - 74 SG Signal ground - 5 +24VD4 +24V -
B12 RETS5-0A PFP/LCF sensor detection signal - COV-SW, TNR-SW, USD-TNR-FLL-SNR1 89 SG Signal ground - 75 AD[14] PCI address/data bus [14] - 6 SCNM-A Scan motor drive signal-A - CN401 FAX BOARD (CN401) <-> FAX POWER RELAY BOARD (CN812)
Pin No Symbol Name Active 76 AD[15] PCI address/data bus [15] -
B13 RETS6-0A PFP/LCF sensor detection signal - 90 WP Not connected -
77 SG Signal ground -
(OPTION)
B14 RETS7-0A PFP/LCF sensor detection signal - A1 MAMPL-1 Main motor PLL signal L: Normal 91 SDA Presence-detect serial data -
78 AD[13] PCI address/data bus [13] -
CN22 PWA-F-SLG (CN22) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (SLG) Pin No Symbol Name Active
B15 SCSWB-0A PFP/LCF input select signal - L: Braking 92 SCL Presence-detect serial clock - Pin No Symbol Name Active
A2 MAMBK-0A Main motor brake signal 79 AD[12] PCI address/data bus [12] - 1 NC Not connected -
B16 LCCNT-0 LCF connection signal L H: Normal 93 SG Signal ground -
80 AD[11] PCI address/data bus [11] - 1 MDT[0] ROM data bus [0] - 2 +12VB +12V -
L: CW 94 DQ4 Memory data bus [4] -
81 AD[10] PCI address/data bus [10] - 2 MDT[2] ROM data bus [2] - 3 -12VB -12V -
A3 MAMCW-0A Main motor rotational direction signal 95 DQ5 Memory data bus [5] -
CN304 PWA-F-LGC (CN304) <-> PWA-F-ADU (CN211, 212), ADU-CLT, PWA- H: CCW 82 SG Signal ground - 3 MDT[4] ROM data bus [4] - 4 NC Not connected -
96 VDD +2.5V -
F-SFB (J619), SFB-SNR, SFB-FEED-CLT, SFB-SOL, SFB-FED-SER A4 MAMON-0A Main motor ON/OFF signal
L: ON
97 DM0 Data write mask signal [0] - 83 SG Signal ground - 4 MDT[6] ROM data bus [6] - 5 NC Not connected -
H: OFF 5 MRD ROM data read signal - 6 NC Not connected -
Pin No Symbol Name Active 98 DQ6 Memory data bus [6] - 84 AD[9] PCI address/data bus [9] -
A5 SG Signal ground - 85 AD[8] PCI address/data bus [8] - (PNCNT)DLA 7 AG Analog ground -
A1 PG Power ground - 99 DQ7 Memory data bus [7] - 6 D/L address bus [0] -
A6 +5.1VB +5V - 86 C/BE(0)# Command and byte enable-0 - D[0] 8 SG Signal ground -
A2 PG Power ground - 100 SG Signal ground -
A3 +24VD1 +24V - A7 MAMCK-1A Main motor reference clock signal - 101 NC Not connected - 87 AD[7] PCI address/data bus [7] - (SSW)DLAD
7 D/L address bus [2] -
A4 +24VD1 +24V - A8 +24VD2 +24V - 102 NC Not connected - 88 +3.3VA +3.3V - [2] CN501 FAX BOARD (CN501) <-> NCU (1) (OPTION)
A5 ADM2D-0A ADU motor drive signal-D - A9 DEVFN-0A Developer unit cooling fan-1 motor drive signal - 103 NC Not connected - 89 +3.3VA +3.3V - 8 MAD[4] ROM address bus [4] - Pin No Symbol Name Active
A6 ADM2B-0A ADU motor drive signal-B - A10 +24VD2 +24V - 104 VDD +2.5V - 90 AD[6] PCI address/data bus [6] - 9 MAD[6] ROM address bus [6] - 1 TXOUT Transmitted FAX data -
A7 ADM2C-0A ADU motor drive signal-C - A11 DEVCL-OA Developer drive clutch drive signal - 105 DQ12 Memory data bus [12] - 91 AD[5] PCI address/data bus [5] - 10 MAD[8] ROM address bus [8] - 2 RXIN Received FAX data -
A8 ADM2A-0A ADU motor drive signal-A - A12 TNRMT-0A Toner motor drive signal - 106 DQ13 Memory data bus [13] - 92 AD[4] PCI address/data bus [4] - 11 MAD[10] ROM address bus [10] - 3 CML CML relay drive signal -
A9 CRT-DOWN ADU motor control signal - A13 TNRMT-1A Toner motor drive signal - 107 DM1 Data write mask signal [1] - 93 RSV Not used - 12 MAD[12] ROM address bus [12] - 4 LD Dial pulse drive signal -
A10 ADTR2-1 ADU exit sensor detection signal L A14 +24VD2 +24V - 108 VDD +2.5V - 94 AD[2] PCI address/data bus [2] - 13 MAD[14] ROM address bus [14] - 5 EXTRG RG relay drive signal -
A11 +5.1VB +5V - A15 RGTCL-0A Registration clutch drive signal - 109 DQ14 Memory data bus [14] - 95 AD[3] PCI address/data bus [3] - 14 MAD[16] ROM address bus [16] - 6 ATT3DB -3db ATT exchange signal -
A12 SG Signal ground - A16 NC Not connected - 110 DQ15 Memory data bus [15] - 96 AD[0] PCI address/data bus [0] - 15 MAD[18] ROM address bus [18] - 7 RLADJ1 MODEM select signal -
A13 ADCNT-1 ADU connection detection signal L A17 NC Not connected - 111 CKE1 Clock enable signal - 97 +5.1VA +5V - 16 SG Signal ground - 8 RLADJ2 MODEM select signal -
A14 ADTR1-1 ADU entrance sensor detection signal L B1 SG Signal ground - 112 VDD +2.5V - 98 RSV WIP Not used - 17 SG Signal ground - 9 RGCLK Not used -
A15 ADCOV-1 ADU opening/closing switch detection signal L B2 PSTPC-1 Registration sensor detection signal - 113 NC Not connected - 99 AD[1] PCI address/data bus [1] - 18 MDT[1] ROM data bus [1] - 10 AG Analog ground -
A16 +24VD1 +24V - B3 +5.1VB +5V - 114 DQ20 Memory data bus [20] - 100 RSV WIP Not used - 19 MDT[3] ROM data bus [3] - 11 -12VB -12V -
A17 ADUCL-0 ADU clutch drive signal L B4 SG Signal ground - 115 A12 Memory address bus [12] - 101 SG Signal ground - 20 MDT[5] ROM data bus [5] - 12 AG Analog ground -
A18 NC Not connected - B5 CUFED-1 Upper drawer feed sensor detection signal - 116 SG Signal ground - 102 SG Signal ground - 21 MDT[7] ROM data bus [7] - 13 +12VB +12V -
B1 SG Signal ground - B6 +5.1VB +5V - 117 DQ21 Memory data bus [21] - 103 AC SYNC Signal ground - 22 CS02-0 Chip select signal - 14 +24VB +24V -
B2 SG Signal ground - B7 SG Signal ground - 118 A11 Memory address bus [11] - 104 M66EN PCI bus 66 MHz clock enable signal - (PNCNT)DLA 15 16Hz Not used -
B8 CLFED-1 Lower drawer feed sensor detection signal - 23 D/L address bus [1] -
B3 SFBZ0 SFB paper size detection signal-0 - 119 DM2 Data write mask signal [2] - 105 AC SDATA IN Not used - D[1] 16 AG Analog ground -
B4 SFBZ1 SFB paper size detection signal-1 - B9 +5.1VB +5V - 120 VDD +2.5V - AC SDATA (MER)DLAD 17 CI Ring signal detection L
B10 SDCSW-1 Side cover opening/closing switch signal - 106 Signal ground - 24 D/L address bus [3] - 18 ANSDET Facsimile data answer detection L
B5 SFBZ2 SFB paper size detection signal-2 - 121 DQ22 Memory data bus [22] - OUT [3]
B6 SFBZ3 SFB paper size detection signal-3 - B11 SG Signal ground - 122 A8 Memory address bus [4] - 107 AC BIT CLK Signal ground - 25 MAD[5] ROM address bus [5] - 19 REVA Line 1 External telephone hook detection signal -
B7 +5.1VB +5V - B12 SG Signal ground - 123 DQ23 Memory data bus [23] - AC CODEC 26 MAD[7] ROM address bus [7] - 20 REVB Line 1 External telephone hook detection signal -
B8 SFBSW-1 SFB bypass paper sensor detection signal - B13 BTLSW-1 Toner cartridge switch signal - 124 SG Signal ground - 108 Signal ground - 21 INTHOOK Internal telephone hook signal -
ID0# 27 MAD[9] ROM address bus [9] -
B9 SG Signal ground - B14 SG Signal ground - 125 A6 Memory address bus [3] - 28 MAD[11] ROM address bus [11] - 22 EXTHO OK External telephone hook signal -
AC CODEC
B10 +24VD1 +24V - B15 TBFL-1 Toner bag full detection sensor-1 signal - 126 DQ28 Memory data bus [28] - 109 Signal ground - 29 MAD[13] ROM address bus [13] - 23 +5.1VA +5V -
B16 +5.1VB +5V - ID1#
B11 FFBCL-0A Bypass feed clutch drive signal L 127 DQ29 Memory data bus [29] - 30 MAD[15] ROM address bus [15] - 24 AG Anlog ground -
B17 NC Not connected - 110 AC RESET# Signal ground -
B12 +24VD1 +24V - 128 VDD +2.5V - 31 MAD[17] ROM address bus [17] - 25 +5VA +5V -
MOD AUDIO
B13 SOLSFB-0A Bypass pickup solenoid drive signal - 129 DM3 Data write mask signal [3] - 111 Not used - 32 ROMDT-0 ROM select signal - 26 -12VB -12V -
CN320 PWA-F-LGC (CN320) <-> DEV-FAN-MOT2 MON 27 AG Analog ground -
B14 SG Signal ground - 130 A3 Memory address bus [3] - 33 +5.1VB +5V -
112 RSV Not used -
B15 SFDFED-1 Bypass feed sensor detection signal - Pin No Symbol Name Active 131 DQ30 Memory data bus [30] - 34 LED LED drive signal - 28 +12VB +12V -
113 AUDIO GND Not used - 29 +24VB +24V -
B16 +5.1VB +5V - 1 +24VD2 +24V - 132 SG Signal ground -
114 SG Signal ground - 30 PG Power ground -
B17 SFBSW SFB connection detection signal L 2 DV2FN-0A Developer unit cooling fan-2 motor drive signal - 133 DQ31 Memory data bus [31] - CN2 INV-EXP (CN2) <-> LP-EXPO
SYS AUDIO
B18 NC Not connected - 134 CB4 Not used - 115 Not used -
OUT Pin No Symbol Name Active
CN101 PWA-F-SYS (CN101) <-> PWA-F-SLG (CN4) 135 CB5 Not used -
1 - Exposure lamp high-voltage output - CN502 FAX BOARD (CN502) <-> NCU (2) (OPTION)
SYS AUDIO
CN305 PWA-F-LGC (CN305) <-> EMP-U-SNR, CST-U-TRY-SNR, CST-U- Pin No Symbol Name Active 136 VDD +2.5V - 116 Not used - 2 NC Not connected - Pin No Symbol Name Active
137 CK0 Clock-0 input - IN
FEED-CLT, NEMP-U-SNR, EMP-L-SNR, CST-L-TRY-SNR, CST-L- 1 SYSRST System reset signal -
138 /CK0 Differential clock-0 input - SYS AUDIO 3 NC Not connected - 1 TXB Transmitted FAX data -
2 SCTS Transmission enabled - 117 Not used - 4 - Exposure lamp high-voltage output - 2 RXIN Received FAX data -
FEED-CLT, NEMP-L-SNR 3 STXD Transmitted SLG data - 139 SG Signal ground - OUT GND 3 CML CML relay drive signal -
Pin No Symbol Name Active 140 DM8 Data write mask signal [8] - SYS AUDIO 4 LD Dial pulse drive signal -
A1 SG Signal ground -
4 SRXD Received SLG data -
141 A10 Memory address bus [10] - 118
IN GND
Not used - CN206 PWA-F-LRL (CN206) <-> PER-F-LDR (C201) 5 ER/HK Not used -
5 SRTS Transmission request signal - Pin No Symbol Name Active
A2 CUEMP-1 Upper drawer empty sensor detection signal - 6 SCNT SLG board connection detection signal - 142 CB6 Not used - 119 AUDIO GND Not used - 6 ATT3DB -3 db ATT exchange signal -
A3 +5.1VB +5V - 143 VDD +2.5V - 120 AUDIO GND Not used - 1 SG Signal ground - 7 RLADJ1 Modem select signal -
7 SG Signal ground - 2 +5.1VD +5V -
A4 SG Signal ground - 8 SVDEN Vertical scanning synchronized signal - 144 CB7 Not used - 121 RSV Not used - 8 RLADJ2 Modem select signal -
A5 CUTOP-1 Upper drawer tray-up sensor detection signal - 145 SG Signal ground - 122 MPCIACT# Not used - 3 +5.1VD +5V - 9 RGCLK Not used
9 SDCLK Clock signal for scanning data transmission - 4 SG Signal ground -
A6 +5.1VB +5V - 10 SHDEN Horizontal scanning synchronized signal - 146 DQ36 Memory data bus [36] - 123 VCC5VA Not used - 10 AG Signal ground -
A7 CURGC-0A Upper drawer feed clutch drive signal - 147 DQ37 Memory data bus [37] - 124 +3.3VA +3.3V - 5 WRLVL-1 Laser level control signal (reference voltage) - 11 -12VB -12V -
11 SG Signal ground - 6 SG Signal ground -
A8 +24VD1 +24V - 12 SG Signal ground - 148 VDD +2.5V - 12 AG Analog ground -
7 NC Not used -
A9 SG Signal ground - 13 SCD7 Scanning data [7] - 149 DM4 Data write mask signal [4] - CN119 PWA-F-SYS (CN119) <-> HDD (CN171) 8 SG Signal ground -
13 +12VB +12V -
A10 CUFLS-1 Upper drawer paper stock sensor detection signal - 150 DQ38 Memory data bus [38] - 14 NC Not connected -
14 SCD6 Scanning data [6] - Pin No Symbol Name Active 9 PIDT-1 Laser image data (differential signal +) -
A11 +5.1VB +5V - 15 SCD5 Scanning data [5] - 151 DQ39 Memory data bus [39] - 15 16Hz Not used -
1 +12VA +12V - 10 PIDT-0 Laser image data (differential signal -) -
B1 SG Signal ground - 16 SCD4 Scanning data [4] - 152 SG Signal ground - 16 AG Analog ground -
2 SG Signal ground - 11 SG Signal ground -
B2 CLEMP-1 Lower drawer empty sensor detection signal - 17 SCD3 Scanning data [3] - 153 DQ44 Memory data bus [44] - 17 CI Ring signal detect L
3 SG Signal ground - 12 WRAPC-0 APC write signal -
B3 +5.1VB +5V - 18 SCD2 Scanning data [2] - 154 /RAS Row address strobe signal - 18 ANSDET Facsimile data answer detection L
4 +5.1VA +5V - 13 NC Not used -
B4 SG Signal ground - 19 SCD1 Scanning data [1] - 155 DQ45 Memory data bus [45] - 19 REVA Line 2 External telephone hook detection signal -
B5 CLTOP-1 Lower drawer tray-up sensor detection signal - 156 VDD +2.5V - 14 SHDWM-1 Laser shut down signal - 20 REVB Line 2 External telephone hook detection signal -
B6 +5.1VB +5V -
20 SCD0 Scanning data [0] -
157 /CS0 Chip select signal-0 - CN121 PWA-F-SYS (CN124) <-> PCI (CN801)/SCRAMBLER BOARD 15 SG Signal ground - 21 NC Not connected -
B7 CLRGC-0 Lower drawer feed clutch drive signal -
CN102 PWA-F-SYS (CN102) <-> FAX BOARD (CN701) (OPTION)
158 /CS1 Chip select signal-1 - (OPTION) 16 +5.1VD +5V - 22 NC Not connected -
B8 +24VD1 +24V - 159 DM5 Data write mask signal [5] - Pin No Symbol Name Active 17 +5.1VD +5V - 23 +5.1VA +5V -
B9 SG Signal ground - Pin No Symbol Name Active 160 SG Signal ground - 18 SG Signal ground -
1 +3.3VA +3.3V - 24 AG Analog ground -
B10 CLFLS-0 Upper drawer paper stock sensor detection signal - 1 +5.1VB +5V - 161 DQ46 Memory data bus [46] - 2 +3.3VA +3.3V - 25 +5VA +5V -
B11 +5.1VB +5V - 2 DA1 IDE Address [1] - 162 DQ47 Memory data bus [47] - 3 +3.3VA +3.3V - CN207 PWA-F-LRL (CN207) <-> PWA-F-SNS (CN202) 26 -12VB -12V -
3 +5.1VB +5V - 163 NC Not connected - Pin No Symbol Name Active
4 SG Signal ground - 27 AG Analog ground -
4 DD0 FAX data bus [0] -
CN306 PWA-F-LGC (CN306) <-> PS-HVT (CN551), TRY-MOT, CST-TR-L- 5 +5.1VB +5V -
164 VDD +2.5V - 5 -12VA -12V - 1 +5.1VB +5V - 28 +12VB +12V -
165 DQ52 Memory data bus [52] - 6 -12VA -12V - 2 SG Signal ground - 29 NC Not connected -
CLT, CST-TR-LCLT, CST-TR-H-CLT, CST-U-SW, CST-L-SW 6 DD3 FAX data bus [3] - 166 DQ53 Memory data bus [53] - 7 +5.1VA +5V - 3 BDIN-1 Laser beam position detection signal - 30 NC Not connected -
Pin No Symbol Name Active 7 +5.1VB +5V - 167 NC Not connected - 8 +5.1VA +5V -
A1 NC Not connected - 8 DD6 FAX data bus [6] -
A2 NC Not connected - 9 +5.1VB +5V -
168 VDD +2.5V - 9 +3.3VA +3.3V - CN412 PS-ACC (CN412) <-> PWA-F-SYS (CN120) CN503 FAX BOARD (CN503) <-> SPEAKER (OPTION)
169 DM6 Data write mask signal [6] - 10 IDSEL0 PCI slot-0 IDselect sIgnal -
A3 CLTRM-0A Tray-up motor drive signal + - 10 DD9 FAX data bus [9] - Pin No Symbol Name Active Pin No Symbol Name -
170 DQ54 Memory data bus [54] - 11 OPBINT(0) Interrupt request-0 -
A4 CLTRM-1A Tray-up motor drive signal - - 11 SG Signal ground - 1 PWR-EN Power supply enable signal L 1 SP+ Speaker output (+) -
171 DQ55 Memory data bus [55] - 12 SG Signal ground -
A5 CUTRC-0B Transport clutch (low speed) drive signal - 12 DD12 FAX data bus [12] - 2 PWR-DN AC main power down signal L 2 SP- Speaker output (-) -
172 VDD +2.5V - 13 IDSEL0 PCI slot-1 IDselect sIgnal -
A6 +24VD1 +24V - 13 SG Signal ground - Reserved
173 NC Not connected - 14 SG Signal ground - 3 -12V (Reserved) -
A7 CFEDC-0A Transport clutch (high speed) drive signal - 14 SG Signal ground - 174 DQ60 Memory data bus [60] - 15 PCICLK(3) PCI clock-3 -
(-12VB) CN600 FAX BOARD (CN600) <-> MDM (CN401) (OPTION)
A8 +24VD1 +24V - 15 SG Signal ground - 175 DQ61 Memory data bus [61] - 4 SG Signal ground - Pin No Symbol Name Active
16 SG Signal ground -
A9 SG Signal ground - 16 SG Signal ground - 176 SG Signal ground - 5 +12VB +12V - 1 TXOUT2 Transmitted data -
17 REQ(1)# Data request signal-1 -
A10 CUSW-0 Upper drawer detection switch signal - 17 SG Signal ground - 177 DM7 Data write mask signal [7] - 6 SG Signal ground - 2 +5VA +5V -
18 REQ(0)# Data request signal-0 -
A11 SG Signal ground - 18 SG Signal ground - 178 DQ62 Memory data bus [62] - 7 +12VA +12V - 3 +12VB +12V -
19 +3.3VA +3.3V -
A12 CLSW-0 Lower drawer detection switch signal - 19 +3.3VB +3.3V - 179 DQ63 Memory data bus [63] - 8 SG Signal ground - 4 +3.3VB +3.3V -
20 AD[31] PCI address/data bus [31] -
A13 NC Not connected - 20 INTRQ IDE Interrupt request signal - 180 VDD +2.5V - Reserved 5 MOD2DMA-1 Modem 2 DMA signal -
21 AD[29] PCI address/data bus [29] - 9 -12V (Reserved) -
B1 NC Not connected - 21 +3.3VB +3.3V - 181 SA0 Presence-detect address [0] - (-12VA) 6 SG Signal ground -
22 SG Signal ground -
B2 +24VD1 +24V - 22 +5.1VA +5V - 182 SA1 Presence-detect address [1] - 10 SG Signal ground - 7 MEM2CS-0 SRAM chip select signal -
23 AD[27] PCI address/data bus [27] -
B3 PG Power ground - 23 -12VB -12V - 183 SA2 Presence-detect address [2] - 11 SG Signal ground - 8 +5.1VB +5V -
24 AD[25] PCI address/data bus [25] -
B4 HVTM-0A Drum main charger grid voltage ON/OFF signal - 24 SG Signal ground - 184 +3.3VA +3.3V - 12 SG Signal ground - 9 MEMRD2-0 SRAM data read signal -
25 +3.3VA +3.3V -
B5 HVMR-1A Drum main charger grid output reference voltage Analog 25 +12VB +12V - 13 +3.3VA +3.3V - 10 CLKOE-1 Clock out enable signal -
26 C/BE(3]# Command and byte enable-3 -
B6 HVTD-0A Developer bias high-voltage ON/OFF signal - 26 DA0 IDE Address [0] - 14 +3.3VA +3.3V -
B7 HVDVR-1A Developer bias high-voltage output reference voltage Analog 27 DA2 IDE Address [2] -
CN109 PWA-F-SYS (CN109) <-> PWA-F-LGC (CN321) 27 AD[23] PCI address/data bus [23] - 11 TXEN2-1 TX enable signal -
15 +3.3VA +3.3V - 12 +5.1VB +5V -
B8 HVTT-0A Transfer belt high-voltage ON/OFF signal - 28 IDECS IDE chip select signal - Pin No Symbol Name Active 28 SG Signal ground -
29 AD[21] PCI address/data bus [21] - 16 +3.3VA +3.3V - 13 A[16] MDM address bus [16] -
B9 HVTVR-1A Transfer belt high-voltage output reference voltage Analog 29 DD1 FAX data bus [1] - A1 +5.1VB +5V -
30 AD[19] PCI address/data bus [19] - 17 SG Signal ground - 14 A[14] MDM address bus [14] -
B10 HVTGB-0A Transfer guide bias voltage ON/OFF signal - 30 DD2 FAX data bus [2] - A2 CBSY-0 System command busy -
31 +3.3VA +3.3V - 18 SG Signal ground - 15 A[12] MDM address bus [12] -
B11 HVTSP-0A Separation bias voltage ON/OFF signal - 31 DD4 FAX data bus [4] - A3 CMD-0 Command data -
32 AD[17] PCI address/data bus [17] - 19 +3.3VB +3.3V - 16 A[10] MDM address bus [10] -
B12 HVSAV-1A Separation bias voltage output reference voltage Analog 32 DD5 FAX data bus [5] - A4 SACK-0 System status acknowledge signal -
33 C/BE(2)# Command and byte enable-2 - 20 +3.3VB +3.3V - 17 A[8] MDM address bus [8] -
B13 HVTSTS High-voltage power supply abnormality detection signal - 33 DD7 FAX data bus [7] - A5 SERR-0 System status error signal -
34 SG Signal ground - 21 SG Signal ground - 18 A[6] MDM address bus [6] -
34 DD8 FAX data bus [8] - A6 SBSY-0 System status busy signal -
35 IRDY# Initiator ready L 22 SG Signal ground - 19 A[4] MDM address bus [4] -
A7 STS-0 Status data -
CN307 PWA-F-LGC (CN307) <-> PS-ACC (CN413, 414), LSU-FAN-MOT 35 DD10 FAX data bus [10] -
A8 CACK-0 System command acknowledge signal - 36 +3.3VA +3.3V - 23 SG Signal ground - 20 A[2] MDM address bus [2] -
Pin No Symbol Name Active 36 DD11 FAX data bus [11] - 24 +5.1VA +5V - 21 A[0] MDM address bus [0] -
A9 CERR-0 System command error signal - 37 DEVSEL# Device select L
1 +3.3VB +3.3V - 37 DD13 FAX data bus [13] - 25 +5.1VB +5V - 22 +5.1VB +5V -
A10 SG Signal ground - 38 SG Signal ground -
2 SG Signal ground - 38 DD14 FAX data bus [14] - 26 +5.1VA +5V - 23 CEP1RST-0 CEP1 reset signal -
A11 SG Signal ground - 39 LOCK# +3.3V L
3 +5.1VB +5V - 39 DD15 FAX data bus [15] - 24 +5.1VB +5V -
A12 SG Signal ground - 40 PERR# Data parity Error -
4 +5.1VB +5V - 40 /DIOR IDE I/O read signal -
A13 IRCLK-1 Clock signal input for image data transmission - 41 +3.3VA +3.3V - CN413 PS-ACC (CN413) <-> PWA-F-LGC (CN307), PWA-F-FIL (CN495)/ 25 SG Signal ground -
41 /DIOW IDE I/O write signal - 26 CEPCLK System clock signal -
5 SG Signal ground -
42 /DMACK DMA acknowledge signal - A14 SG Signal ground - 42 SERR# System Error L PWA-F-FUS (CN431) 27 SG Signal ground -
6 SG Signal ground - A15 HSYNC-0 Horizontal scanning synchronized signal - 43 +3.3VA +3.3V - Pin No Symbol Name Active
7 +12VB +12V - 43 /DLDCS0 Chip select signal - 28 D[0] MDM data bus [0] -
A16 SG Signal ground - 44 C/BE(1)# Command and byte enable-1 - 1 +3.3VB +3.3V -
8 SG Signal ground - 44 /RESET Reset signal L 29 D[2] MDM data bus [2] -
A17 VSYNC-0 Vertical scanning synchronized signal - 45 AD[14] PCI address/data bus [14] - 2 SG Signal ground -
9 PDWN-1A AC main power down signal - 45 DMARQ DMA request signal - 30 D[4] MDM data bus [4] -
B1 MCNT-1 LGC board connection detection signal - 46 SG Signal ground - 3 +5.1VB +5V -
10 PWREN-0A Power supply enable signal L 46 NC Not connected - 31 D[6] MDM data bus [6] -
B2 SYSRST-0 System reset signal - 47 AD[12] PCI address/data bus [12] - 4 +5.1VB +5V -
11 +24VD1 +24V - 47 FXWP FAX wake-up signal - 32 D[8] MDM data bus [8] -
B3 IDATX[0] IDA Transmitted data bus [0] - 48 AD[10] PCI address/data bus [10] - 5 SG Signal ground -
12 +24VD1 +24V - 48 SG Signal ground - 33 D[10] MDM data bus [10] -
B4 IDATX[1] IDA Transmitted data bus [1] - 49 M66EN PCI bus 66 MHz clock enable signal - 6 SG Signal ground -
13 PG Power ground - 49 SG Signal ground - 34 D[12] MDM data bus [12] -
B5 IDATX[2] IDA Transmitted data bus [2] - 50 SG Signal ground - 7 +12VB +12V -
14 PG Power ground - 50 NC Not connected - 35 D[14] MDM data bus [14] -
B6 IDATX[3] IDA Transmitted data bus [3] - 51 AD[8] PCI address/data bus [8] - 8 SG Signal ground -
15 +5.1VD +5V - 52 AD[7] PCI address/data bus [7] - 36 SG Signal ground -
B7 IDATX[4] IDA Transmitted data bus [4] - 9 PDWN-1A AC main power down signal L
16 SG Signal ground - CN104 PWA-F-SYS (CN104) <-> PWA-F-DSP (J427) B8 IDATX[5] IDA Transmitted data bus [5] - 53 +3.3VA +3.3V - 37 MOD2DET-0 Modem 2 detection signal -
10 PWRFN-0A Power supply cooling fan drive signal -
17 +24VD1 +24V - Pin No Symbol Name Active B9 IDATX[6] IDA Transmitted data bus [6] - 54 AD[5] PCI address/data bus [5] - 38 SG Signal ground -
11 +5.1VB +5V - 39 DREQC2-1 Data request signal -
18 POLFN-0A Laser unit cooling fan motor drive signal - 1 XSCL-1A LCD data transmission clock - B10 IDATX[7] IDA Transmitted data bus [7] - 55 AD[3] PCI address/data bus [3] - 12 SG Signal ground - 40 DACKC2-0 Data acknowledge signal -
2 LP-1A LCD data latch pulse H B11 SG Signal ground - 56 SG Signal ground - 13 +24VB +24V -
CN308 PWA-F-LGC (CN308) <-> M/DC-POL 3 WF-1A LCD frame signal H 57 AD[1] PCI address/data bus [1] - 41 RXIN2 Received data -
B12 IDCLK-1 Clock signal output for image data transmission - 14 PG Power ground -
4 YD-1A LCD scanning line start signal H 42 AG Analog ground -
Pin No Symbol Name Active B13 SG Signal ground - 58 +3.3VA +3.3V -
5 INVGND Signal ground - 59 +5.1VA +5V - 43 -12VB -12V -
1 POMPL-0 Polygonal motor PLL signal L: Normal B14 IHDEN-0 Data enable of the horizontal scanning direction - CN414 PS-ACC (CN414) <-> PWA-F-LGC (CN301, CN307)
6 BZON-0A Buzzer-ON signal L 60 SG Signal ground - 44 AG Analog ground -
L: ON B15 SG Signal ground -
2 POMON-0A Polygonal motor ON/OFF signal 7 CPPOW-1A Panel connection detection signal H 61 +3.3VA +3.3V - Pin No Symbol Name Active 45 MOD2INT-1 Modem 2 interrupt signal -
H: OFF B16 IVDEN-0 Data enable of the vertical scanning direction -
8 LDCLK-1A LED serial clock - 62 +3.3VA +3.3V - 1 +24VD1 +24V - 46 MOD2CS-0 Modem 2 chip select signal -
3 POMCK-0A Polygonal motor reference clock signal - B17 +3.3VB +3.3V -
9 LDDAT-1A LED serial data - 63 +3.3VA +3.3V - 2 +24VD1 +24V - 47 MOD2RST-0 Modem 2 reset signal -
4 PG Power ground - 3 PG Power ground - 48 SG Signal ground -
10 LDLTH-1A LED data latch signal L
5 +24VD1 +24V -
11 LDON1-0A LED drive selection signal-1 L
CN110 PWA-F-SYS (CN110) <-> LAN (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) 64 SG Signal ground -
4 PG Power ground - 49 RXEN2-1 RX enable signal -
65 +12VA +12V -
12 LDON0-0A LED drive selection signal-0 L Pin No Symbol Name Active 5 +24VD2 +24V - 50 MEMWRH2-0 SRAM high byte write signal -
66 +12VA +12V -
CN309 PWA-F-LGC (CN309) <-> PWA-F-LRL (CN204) 13 SG Signal ground - 1 TXD+ Transmitted data + -
67 +5.1VA +5V - 6 +24VD2 +24V - 51 MEMWRL2-0 SRAM low byte write signal -
Pin No Symbol Name Active 14 +5.1VA +5V - 2 TXD- Transmitted data - -
68 +5.1VA +5V - 7 PG Power ground - 52 A[18] MDM address bus [18] -
1 SG Signal ground - 15 +5.1VA +5V - 3 RXIN+ Received data + - 8 PG Power ground - 53 A[17] MDM address bus [17] -
69 +3.3VA +3.3V -
2 +5.1VD +5V - 16 +5.1VA +5V - 4 GND Not used - 9 +5.1VD +5V - 54 A[15] MDM address bus [15] -
70 OPBINT(1) Interrupt request-1 -
3 +5.1VD +5V - 17 +5.1VA +5V - 5 GND Not used - 10 SG Signal ground - 55 A[13] MDM address bus [13] -
71 +3.3VA +3.3V -
4 SG Signal ground - 18 CPRST-0A Reset signal L 6 RXIN- Received data - - 56 A[11] MDM address bus [11] -
72 PCIRST# PCI reset signal -
5 WRLVL-1 Laser level control signal (reference voltage) - 19 SG Signal ground - 7 GND Not used - CN415 PS-ACC (CN415) <-> PWA-F-SLG (CN36), RADF (CN1) (OPTION) 57 A[9] MDM address bus [9] -
73 +3.3VA +3.3V -
6 SG Signal ground - 8 GND Not used - 58 A[7] MDM address bus [7] -
20 RTS0-0A Key controller SIO Transmission request signal - 74 PCICLK(4) PCI clock-4 - Pin No Symbol Name Active
7 BDIN-1 Laser beam position detection signal - 21 CTS0-0A Key controller SIO Transmission enabled signal - 75 +3.3VA +3.3V - 1 +24VD3 +24V - 59 A[5] MDM address bus [5] -
8 SG Signal ground - 22 SOUT(0) Key controller SIO transmitted serial data - CN111 PWA-F-SYS (CN111) <-> INTERNAL USB CONNECTOR 76 GNT(1)# Grant-1 - 2 +24VD3 +24V - 60 A[3] MDM address bus [3] -
9 PIDT-1 Laser image data (differential signal +) - 23 SIN(0) Key controller SIO received serial data - Pin No Symbol Name Active 77 GNT(0)# Grant-0 - 3 PG Power ground - 61 A[1] MDM address bus [1] -
10 PIDT-0 Laser image data (differential signal -) - 24 SG Signal ground - 1 VBUS +5V - 78 SG Signal ground - 4 PG Power ground - 62 CPURST-0 CPU reset signal -
11 SG Signal ground - 25 UD3-1A LCD display data-3 - 2 D0- USB serial data - 79 PME# +3.3V - 5 +5.1VB +5V - 63 CEP2INT-1 CEP2 interrupt signal -
12 WRAPC-0 APC write signal - 26 UD2-1A LCD display data-2 - 3 D0+ USB serial data - 80 AD[30] PCI address/data bus [30] - 6 +5.1VB +5V - 64 +5.1VB +5V -
13 +5.1VB +5V - 27 UD1-1A LCD display data-1 - 4 SG Signal ground - 81 +3.3VA +3.3V - 7 SG Signal ground - 65 +5.1VB +5V -
14 SHDWM-1 Laser shut down signal - 28 UD0-1A LCD display data-0 - 5 VBUS +5V - 82 AD[28] PCI address/data bus [28] - 8 SG Signal ground - 66 IORD2-0 MDM data read signal -
15 SG Signal ground - 29 SG Signal ground - 6 D1- USB serial data - 83 AD[26] PCI address/data bus [26] - 9 +24VD4 +24V - 67 IOWR2-0 MDM data write signal -
16 +5.1VD +5V - 30 LCDEN-1A LCD enable signal H 7 D1+ USB serial data - 84 SG Signal ground - 10 +24VD4 +24V - 68 D[1] MDM data bus [1] -
17 +5.1VD +5V - 8 SG Signal ground - 85 AD[24] PCI address/data bus [24] - 11 PG Power ground - 69 D[3] MDM data bus [3] -
18 SG Signal ground - CN107 PWA-F-SYS (CN107) <-> COIN CONTROLLER (OPTION)/COPY 86 +3.3VA +3.3V - 12 PG Power ground - 70 D[5] MDM data bus [5] -
KEY CARD (OPTION) CN112 PWA-F-SYS (CN112) <-> HDD (CN170) (STANDARD) 87 +3.3VA +3.3V - 13 NC Not connected - 71 D[7] MDM data bus [7] -
CN312 PWA-F-LGC (CN312) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (LGC) Pin No Symbol Name Active 88 AD[22] PCI address/data bus [22] - 14 NC Not connected - 72 D[9] MDM data bus [9] -
Pin No Symbol Name Active 73 D[11] MDM data bus [11] -
Pin No Symbol Name Active 1 /RESET Reset signal - 89 AD[20] PCI address/data bus [20] - 15 +12VB +12V -
1 L/S Paper size signal - 90 SG Ground - 16 SG Signal ground - 74 D[13] MDM data bus [13] -
1 D[0] ROM data bus [0] - 2 SG Signal ground -
2 FULL-C Full-color mode signal - 91 AD[18] PCI address/data bus [18] - 17 +3.3VB +3.3V - 75 D[15] MDM data bus [15] -
2 D[2] ROM data bus [2] - 3 DD7 Data bus [7] -
3 MONO-C Mono-color mode signal - 92 AD[16] PCI address/data bus [16] - 18 +3.3VB +3.3V - 76 +5.1VB +5V -
3 D[4] ROM data bus [4] - 4 DD8 Data bus [8] -
4 B/W Black and white mode signal - 93 +3.3VA +3.3V - 19 SG Signal ground - 77 +5.1VB +5V -
4 D[6] ROM data bus [6] - 5 DD6 Data bus [6] -
5 +5.1VA +5V - 94 FRAME# Cycle frame L 20 SG Signal ground - 78 CEP2CS-0 CEP2 chip select signal -
5 RD-0 ROM data read signal - 6 DD9 Data bus [9] -
6 SG Signal ground - 95 SG Signal ground - 21 +5.1VB +5V - 79 DREQD2-1 Data request signal -
6 A[0] ROM address bus [0] - 7 DD5 Data bus [5] -
7 NC Not connected - 96 TRDY# Target ready L 22 +5.1VB +5V - 80 DACKD2-0 Data acknowledge signal
7 A[2] ROM address bus [2] - 8 DD10 Data bus [10] -
8 A[4] ROM address bus [4] - 9 DD4 Data bus [4] - 97 SG Signal ground - 23 SG Signal ground -
9 A[6] ROM address bus [6] - CN108 PWA-F-SYS (CN108) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (SYS) 10 DD11 Data bus [11] - 98 STOP# Stop L 24 SG Signal ground - CN602 FAX BOARD (CN602) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (FAX) (OPTION)
10 A[8] ROM address bus [8] - Pin No Symbol Name Active 11 DD3 Data bus [3] - 99 +3.3VA +3.3V - Pin No Symbol Name Active
11 A[10] ROM address bus [10] - 1 DATA0 System data bus [0] - 12 DD12 Data bus [12] - 100 +3.3VA +3.3V - CN416 PS-ACC (CN416) <-> FINISHER (J599) (OPTION) 1 D[0] ROM data bus [0] -
12 A[12] ROM address bus [12] - 2 DATA2 System data bus [2] - 13 DD2 Data bus [2] - 101 SG Signal ground - Pin No Symbol Name Active 2 D[2] ROM data bus [2] -
13 A[14] ROM address bus [14] - 3 DATA4 System data bus [4] - 14 DD13 Data bus [13] - 102 SG Signal ground - 1 +5.1VB +5V - 3 D[4] ROM data bus [4] -
14 A[16] ROM address bus [16] - 4 DATA6 System data bus [6] - 15 DD1 Data bus [1] - 103 PAR Parity - 2 SG Signal ground - 4 D[6] ROM data bus [6] -
15 A[18] ROM address bus [18] - 5 DATA8 System data bus [8] - 16 DD14 Data bus [14] - 104 AD[15] PCI address/data bus [15] - 3 +24VD5 +24V - 5 RD-0 ROM data read signal -
16 SG Signal ground - 6 DATA10 System data bus [10] - 17 DD0 Data bus [0] - 105 +3.3VA +3.3V - 4 PG Power ground - 6 A[0] ROM address bus [0] -
17 SG Signal ground - 7 DATA12 System data bus [12] - 18 DD15 Data bus [15] - 106 AD[13] PCI address/data bus [13] - 7 A[2] ROM address bus [2] -
18 D[1] ROM data bus [1] - 8 DATA14 System data bus [14] - 19 SG Signal ground - 107 AD[11] PCI address/data bus [11] - 8 A[4] ROM address bus [4] -
19 D[3] ROM data bus [3] - 9 A21 System address bus [19] - 108 SG Signal ground - CN418 PS-ACC (CN418) <-> PS-FAN-MOT 9 A[6] ROM address bus [6] -
20 NC(KEY) Not connected -
20 D[5] ROM data bus [5] - 10 A19 System address bus [17] - 109 AD[9] PCI address/data bus [9] - Pin No Symbol Name Active 10 A[8] ROM address bus [8] -
21 MDARQ DMA request signal H
21 D[7] ROM data bus [7] - 11 A17 System address bus [15] - 110 SG Signal ground - 1 +24VD1 +24V - 11 A[10] ROM address bus [10] -
22 SG Signal ground -
22 CS2-0 Chip select signal L 12 A15 System address bus [13] - 111 C/BE(0)# Command and byte enable-0 - 2 PWRFN-0A Power supply cooling fan drive signal - 12 A[12] ROM address bus [12] -
23 /DIOW I/O write signal -
23 A[1] ROM address bus [1] - 13 A13 System address bus [11] - 24 SG Signal ground - 112 +3.3VA +3.3V - 13 A[14] ROM address bus [14] -
24 A[3] ROM address bus [3] - 14 A11 System address bus [9] - 25 /DIOR I/O read signal - 113 AD[6] PCI address/data bus [6] - OUT1 PS-HVT (OUT1) <-> MAIN CHARGER WIRE 14 A[16] ROM address bus [16] -
25 A[5] ROM address bus [5] - 15 A09 System address bus [7] - 26 SG Signal ground - 114 AD[4] PCI address/data bus [4] - Pin No Symbol Name Active 15 A[18] ROM address bus [18] -
26 A[7] ROM address bus [7] - 16 A07 System address bus [5] - 27 IORDY I/O ready signal - 115 SG Signal ground - 1 - High-voltage to main charger wire - 16 SG Signal ground -
27 A[9] ROM address bus [9] - 17 A05 System address bus [3] - 28 SG Signal ground - 116 AD[2] PCI address/data bus [2] - 17 SG Signal ground -
28 A[11] ROM address bus [11] - 18 A03 System address bus [1] - 29 /DMACK DMA acknowledge signal L 117 AD[0] PCI address/data bus [0] - OUT2 PS-HVT (OUT2) <-> MAIN CHARGER GRID 18 D[1] ROM data bus [1] -
29 A[13] ROM address bus [13] - 19 RDX System read signal - 30 SG Signal ground - 118 +3.3VA +3.3V - Pin No Symbol Name Active 19 D[3] ROM data bus [3] -
30 A[15] ROM address bus [15] - 20 CS0-A Chip select signal (0-A) - 31 INTRQ Interrupt request signal H 119 +5.1VA +5V - 20 D[5] ROM data bus [5] -
1 - High-voltage to main charger grid -
31 A[17] ROM address bus [17] - 21 CS0-B Chip select signal (0-B) - 32 RESERVED Reserve signal - 120 +5.1VA +5V - 21 D[7] ROM data bus [7] -
32 ROMDT-0 Download board connection detection signal L 22 +3.3VA +3.3V - 33 DA1 Device address [1] - 22 BOOTCS-0 Chip select signal -
OUT3 PS-HVT (OUT3) <-> DEVELOPER BIAS
33 +5.1VB +5V - 23 +3.3VA +3.3V - 34 /PDIAG Passed diagnostics L CN122 PWA-F-SYS (CN122) <-> FAX POWER RELAY BOARD (OPTION) Pin No Symbol Name Active
23 A[1] ROM address bus [1] -
34 ROMLD-1 External ROM loading status signal L 24 SG Signal ground - 35 DA0 Device address [0] - Pin No Symbol Name Active 24 A[3] ROM address bus [3] -
25 SG Signal ground - 1 - High-voltage to developer charger bias - 25 A[5] ROM address bus [5] -
36 DA2 Device address [2] - 1 -12VA -12V -
CN313 PWA-F-LGC (CN313) <-> IPC BOARD (OPTION) 26 DATA1 System data bus [1] - 37 /CS0 Chip select-0 L 2 SG Signal ground - 26 A[7] ROM address bus [7] -
Pin No Symbol Name Active
27 DATA3 System data bus [3] - 38 /CS1 Chip select-1 L 3 NC Not connected - OUT4 PS-HVT (OUT4) <-> TRANSFER BIAS 27 A[9] ROM address bus [9] -
1 SG Signal ground -
28 DATA5 System data bus [5] - 39 /DASP Device active or slave present signal L Pin No Symbol Name Active 28 A[11] ROM address bus [11] -
29 DATA7 System data bus [7] - 40 SG Signal ground - 1 - High-voltage to transfer charger bias - 29 A[13] ROM address bus [13] -
2 +5.1VB +5V -
30 DATA9 System data bus [9] - 30 A[15] ROM address bus [15] -
3 AD0 System address bus [0] -
4 AD2 System address bus [2] -
31 DATA11 System data bus [11] -
CN113 PWA-F-SYS (CN113) <-> BLUETOOTH MODULE OUT5 PS-HVT (OUT5) <-> TRANSFER GUIDE BIAS 31 A[17] ROM address bus [17] -
32 DATA13 System data bus [13] - 32 ROMDET0-0 Download board connection detection signal L
5 AD4 System address bus [4] - Pin No Symbol Name Active Pin No Symbol Name Active
33 DATA15 System data bus [15] - 33 +5.1VB +5V -
6 AD6 System address bus [6] - 1 VDD +5V - 1 - High-voltage to transfer guide bias -
34 A20 System address bus [18] - 34 LEDDL-0 External ROM loading status signal L
7 I/O00 System data bus [0] - 2 NC Not connected -
35 A18 System address bus [16] -
8 I/O02 System data bus [2] - 3 NC Not connected - OUT6 PS-HVT (OUT6) <-> SEPARATION BIAS
9 I/O04 System data bus [4] -
36 A16 System address bus [14] -
4 D- Serial data - Pin No Symbol Name Active
CN702 FAX BOARD (CN702) <-> FAX POWER RELAY BOARD (CN811)
37 A14 System address bus [12] -
10 I/O06 System data bus [6] -
38 A12 System address bus [10] - 5 D+ Serial data - 1 - High-voltage to separation charger bias - (OPTION)
11 SG Signal ground - 6 NC Not connected - Pin No Symbol Name Active
39 A10 System address bus [8] -
12 WE Write signal - 7 NC Not connected - 1 +24V +24V -
40 A08 System address bus [6] -
13 CSIP2-0A Chip select signal to IP2 - 8 DETACH Signal ground - 2 PG Power ground -
41 A06 System address bus [4] -
14 +5.1VB +5V - 9 NC Not connected - 3 NC Not connected -
42 A04 System address bus [2] -
15 IPCSW-0 IPC connection detection signal L 10 SG Signal ground -
43 A02 System address bus [0] -
16 SG Signal ground - 11 NC Not connected -
17 +5.1VB +5V -
44 A22 System address bus [21] - J600 IPC BOARD (J600) <-> FINISHER (J599) (OPTION)
12 NC Not connected -
18 AD1 System address bus [1] -
45 /CS0 Chip select signal - Pin No Symbol Name Active
46 +3.3VA +3.3V - 13 /RESET Reset signal -
19 AD3 System address bus [3] - 1 RXD Receiver serial data -
47 RMSL System control signal - 14 NC Not connected -
20 AD5 System address bus [5] - 2 SG Signal ground -
48 /WRX System write signal - 15 NC Not connected -
21 AD7 System address bus [7] - 3 TXD Transmitted serial data -
49 SG Signal ground - 16 NC Not connected -
22 I/O01 System data bus [1] - 4 SG Signal ground -
50 SG Signal ground - 17 NC Not connected -
23 I/O03 System data bus [3] - 5 NC Not connected -
18 NC Not connected -
24 I/O05 System data bus [5] - 6 NC Not connected -
19 NC Not connected -
25 I/O07 System data bus [7] - 7 NC Not connected -
20 SG Signal ground -
26 SG Signal ground - 8 NC Not connected -
9 F-CNT Finisher connection detection signal L
27 OE Output enable signal - CN114 PWA-F-SYS (CN114) <-> USB CONNECTOR (HOST) 10 CNT-GND Ground -
28 IPRST-0A IPC reset signal -
Pin No Symbol Name Active
29 +5.1VB +5V -
1 VBUS +5V -
30 SG Signal ground -
2 D0- USB serial data -
3 D0+ USB serial data -
4 SG Signal ground -
5 VBUS +5V -
6 D1- USB serial data -
7 D1+ USB serial data -
8 SG Signal ground -